You are on page 1of 409

Maintenance Manual of Senova X25

Electrical Equipment

BAIC Motor Sales Co., Ltd.


Maintenance Manual
X25 2015
Electrical Equipment
Version:11.2015
X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Contents

60 Power Distribution .................................................... 1 3. Removal and installation of instrument cluster ........ 36


1 Brief Introduction ....................................................... 1 4. Reset trip display ...................................................... 37
2 Technical Parameters .................................................. 1 5. Removal and installation of the quartz clock ........... 38
3 Battery ........................................................................ 1 63 Vehicle Lights.......................................................... 39
3.1 Battery type.............................................................. 1 1 Overview ................................................................... 39
3.2 Precautions for handling vehicle battery.................. 2 2 Technical Parameters................................................. 40
3.3 Inspection of battery ................................................ 2 3 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code.................................. 40
3.3.1 Battery inspection method .................................... 2 3.1 DTC fault code list ................................................. 40
3.3.2 Visual inspection ................................................... 3 3.2 B116512 High Beam Output Short to Power Supply
3.3.3 Battery load test .................................................... 3 B116514 High Beam Output Short to Ground or Open41
3.3.4 Vehicle start test .................................................... 5 3.3 B116412 Low Beam Output Short to Power Supply
3.3.5 Test for vehicle charging system........................... 5 B116414 Low Beam Output Short to Ground or Open 45
3.3.6 Test of battery static voltage ................................. 6 3.4 B110312 Front Fog Light Output Short to Power
3.4 Charge the battery .................................................... 7 Supply B110314 Front Fog Light Output Short to
3.5 Battery cable ............................................................ 7 Ground or Open ........................................................... 49
3.5.1 Disconnection and connection of battery negative 3.5 B110712 Rear Fog Light Output Short to Power
cable ............................................................................... 7 Supply B110714 Rear Fog Light Output Short to
3.5.2 Disconnection and connection of battery positive Ground or Open ........................................................... 53
cable ............................................................................... 8 3.6 B110811 Left Turn Signal Output Short to Ground
3.6 Removal and installation of battery ......................... 9 B110813 Left Turn Signal Output Open ...................... 57
4. Removal and installation of the battery positive fuse 3.7 B110911 Right Turn Signal Output Short to Ground
box ............................................................................... 10 B110913 Right Turn Signal Output Open .................... 61
5 Removal and installation of the front compartment 3.8 B111D11 Hazard Warning Switch Short to Ground
electrical box................................................................ 11 ...................................................................................... 64
62 Instrument Cluster ....................................... 13 3.9 B111E11 Rear Fog Light Switch Short to Ground . 65
1 Brief Introduction ..................................................... 13 3.10 B112C1E High Beam/Overtaking Switch
1.1 General descriptions .............................................. 13 Resistance Abnormal.................................................... 66
1.2 Display information of instrument cluster ............. 13 3.11 B111911 Gearshift Solenoid Valve Output Short to
1.3 Description of indicator information on instrument Ground B111913 Gearshift Solenoid Valve Output Open
cluster .......................................................................... 14 ...................................................................................... 67
2 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ................................. 16 3.12 B110212 Daytime Running Light Output Short to
2.1 DTC fault code list................................................. 16 Power Supply B110214 Daytime Running Light Output
2.2 U014000 Loss of Communication with BCM or Short to Ground or Open .............................................. 69
Length Error of Message Sent by BCM U015100 Loss 4 Interior Lights ........................................................... 72
of Communication with SDM or Length Error of 4.1 Brief Introduction ................................................... 72
Message Sent by SDM U012700 Loss of 4.2 Overview of interior lights ..................................... 72
Communication with TPMS or Length Error of Message 4.3 Front toplight.......................................................... 73
Sent by TPMS U010000 Loss of Communication with 4.3.1 Removal and installation of front toplight .......... 73
EMS or Length Error of Message Sent by EMS.......... 17 4.3.2 Front fog light bulb replacement ......................... 74
2.3 B120100 ABS fault light defective ........................ 23 4.4 Trunk lamp ............................................................. 75
2.4 B120400 Engine Fault Light Defective B120600 4.4.1 Removal and installation of the trunk lamp ........ 75
Engine Anti-theft Fault Light Defective ...................... 24 4.4.2 Replace the trunk lamp bulb................................ 76
2.5 B120200 Brake fault light defective ...................... 25 5 Exterior Lights .......................................................... 76
2.6 B120500 Transmission fault light defective .......... 27 5.1 Brief introduction ................................................... 76
2.7 B120700 Electric power steering fault light 5.2 Front combination light assembly .......................... 78
defective ...................................................................... 28 5.2.1 Overview of front combination light assembly ... 78
2.8 B182011 Fuel Sensor Short to Ground B182012 5.2.2 Removal and installation of front combination
Fuel Sensor Short to Power Supply ............................. 30 light assembly .............................................................. 79
2.9 B111717 Overvoltage B111716 Undervoltage ...... 32 5.2.3 Replace the front combination light bulb ............ 80
2.10 B123296 Mileage data error ................................ 35 5.3 Rear combination light fixed part assembly ........... 85
2.11 B120300 Airbag fault light defective ................... 35 5.3.1 Overview of rear combination light fixed part

-I-
X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

assemblies .................................................................... 85 Ground or Open ......................................................... 111


5.3.2 Removal and installation of the rear combination 4.4 B110612 Rear Defrost Output Short to Power
light fixed part assembly.............................................. 85 Supply B110614 Defrost Output Short to Ground or
5.3.3 Replacement of turn signal bulb ......................... 86 Open B114011 Rear Defrost Switch Stuck ................ 115
5.3.4 Replacement of brake light bulb ......................... 87 4.5 B110E1E Wiper Pause Switch Short to Ground
5.4 Rear combination light movable part assembly ..... 89 B112A11 Front Washer Switch Stuck B112B11 Rear
5.4.1 Overview of rear combination light movable part Washer Switch Stuck.................................................. 119
..................................................................................... 89 4.6 B11EC04 RLS_RS Fault B11ED04 RLS_LS Fault
5.4.2 Removal and installation of the rear combination B11EE04 RLS Installation Fault U12E487 RLS
light movable part assembly ........................................ 89 Response Fault ........................................................... 120
5.4.3 Replacement of reversing light bulb ................... 90 4.7 B112512 Rear Washer Output Short to Power
5.5 Left rear fog light assembly ................................... 92 Supply B112514 Rear Washer Output Short to Ground
5.5.1 Overview of rear fog light assembly................... 92 or Open....................................................................... 124
5.5.2 Removal and installation of rear fog light 4.8 B112612 Rear Wiper Output Short to Power Supply
assembly ...................................................................... 93 B112614 Rear Wiper Output Short to Ground or Open
5.5.3 Rear fog light bulb replacement.......................... 93 .................................................................................... 126
5.6 Front fog light assembly ........................................ 95 5 Front Wiper ............................................................. 131
5.6.1 Overview of front fog lights ............................... 95 5.1 Overview of front wiper ....................................... 131
5.6.2 Removal and installation of front fog light 5.2 Removal and installation of the front wiper blade132
assembly ...................................................................... 95 5.2.1 Removal and installation of the boneless front
5.6.3 Front fog light bulb replacement ........................ 96 wiper blade ................................................................. 132
5.6.4 Adjustment of the front fog light assembly......... 97 5.2.2 Removal and installation of the boned front wiper
5.7 Removal and installation of the high brake light ... 98 blade ........................................................................... 132
5.8 Removal and installation of the side turn signal lamp 5.3 Removal and installation of front wiper arm
..................................................................................... 98 assembly ..................................................................... 134
5.9 License plate light .................................................. 99 5.4 Removal and installation of front wiper motor and
5.9.1 Removal and installation of license plate light linkage assembly ........................................................ 135
assembly ...................................................................... 99 5.5 Adjust reset position of the wiper blade ............... 136
5.9.2 License plate lamp and bulb replacement ........... 99 6 Rear Wiper .............................................................. 137
5.10 Removal and installation of the light switch...... 100 6.1 Overview of rear wiper ........................................ 137
5.11 Combination switch ........................................... 101 6.2 Removal and installation of rear wiper blade....... 138
5.11.1 Overview of combination switch .................... 101 6.3 Removal and installation of rear wiper arm assembly
5.11.2 Removal and installation of combination switch .................................................................................... 138
................................................................................... 102 6.4 Removal and installation of the rear wiper motor
5.12 Removal and installation of hazard warning light assembly ..................................................................... 139
switch ......................................................................... 103 6.5 Adjust reset position of the wiper blade ............... 140
5.13 Removal and installation of brake switch .......... 103 7 Washers System....................................................... 141
5.14 Removal and installation of clutch switch ......... 104 7.1 Overview of front windscreen washing system ... 141
5.15 Removal and installation of the reversing light 7.2 Overview of rear windscreen washing system ..... 142
switch ......................................................................... 105 7.3 Removal and installation of washer pump ........... 143
6 Headlight Adjustment ............................................. 105 7.3.1 Removal and installation of the front windscreen
6.1 Electric height adjustment of front combination light washer pump .............................................................. 143
................................................................................... 105 7.3.2 Removal and installation of the rear windscreen
64 Wiper and Washing System .................................. 106 washer pump .............................................................. 144
1 Brief introduction ................................................... 106 7.4 Removal and installation of washing tank assembly
2 Technical parameters .............................................. 106 .................................................................................... 145
3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting .................... 106 7.5 Removal and installation of the front windscreen
4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ............................... 108 nozzle assembly ......................................................... 145
4.1 DTC fault code list............................................... 108 7.6 Removal and installation of the rear windscreen
4.2 B110412 Front Wiper Enable Output Short to Power nozzle assembly ......................................................... 146
Supply B110414 Front Wiper Enable Output Short to 8 Washing Unit: Check .............................................. 146
Ground or Open ......................................................... 108 9 Removal and installation of the rain/light sensor .... 147
4.3 B110512 Front Wiper Speed Output Short to Power 66 Heating and Cooling System ................................. 149
Supply B110514 Front Wiper Speed Output Short to 1 Rear windscreen defrost system .............................. 149

-II-
X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1.1 Brief introduction ................................................ 149 B113600 EMS Transmission Defective ..................... 165
1.2 How it works ....................................................... 149 1.4.3 B110004 system internal fault ........................... 172
1.3 Inspection of rear windscreen defrost heating wire 1.4.4 B111717 Battery Overvoltage B111716 Battery
................................................................................... 149 Undervoltage .............................................................. 173
1.4 Removal and installation of rear windscreen defrost 1.4.5 U023100 Loss of Communication with RLS .... 177
relay ........................................................................... 150 1.4.6 B11841D Driver’s Window Output Overcurrent
1.5 Removal and installation of rear windscreen defrost .................................................................................... 180
switch ......................................................................... 151 1.4.7 B11271D Right Front Window Output Overcurrent
2 Rearview mirror heating (if any) ............................ 151 .................................................................................... 182
2.1 Brief introduction ................................................ 151 1.4.8 B11281D Right Rear Window Output Overcurrent
2.2 How it works ....................................................... 151 .................................................................................... 183
2.3 Removal and installation of the rearview mirror 1.4.9 B11291D Left Rear Window Output Overcurrent
heating wire ............................................................... 151 .................................................................................... 185
67 Parking Distance Control System ......................... 153 1.4.10 B113912 Horn Output Short to Power Supply
1 Reversing Radar System ......................................... 153 B113914 Horn Output Short to Ground or Open ....... 186
1.1 System overview .................................................. 153 1.4.11 B114111 Rearview mirror folding/unfolding
1.2 Technical parameters ........................................... 153 switch stuck ................................................................ 190
1.3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting ................. 153 1.4.12 B111B71 Trunk release switch stuck ......... 191
1.3.1 The entire reversing radar system not working. 153 1.5 Overview of the anti-theft system ........................ 193
1.3.2 Reverse gear engaged, buzzer sounding constantly 1.6 Removal and installation of body controller ........ 194
................................................................................... 154 2 Ignition Switch Assembly ....................................... 195
1.3.3 The radar is not working when the reverse gear is 2.1 Removal and installation of the steering column lock
engaged ...................................................................... 154 assembly ..................................................................... 195
1.4 Overview of reversing radar ................................ 155 2.2 Removal and installation of ignition switch ......... 196
1.5 Removal and installation of the reversing radar 3 Oil Line Automatic Cut-off System ........................ 198
control unit................................................................. 156 69 Audio Visual System ............................................. 199
1.6 Reversing radar probe .......................................... 157 1 Brief introduction .................................................... 199
1.6.1 Removal and installation of reversing radar probe 1.1 General descriptions ............................................. 199
................................................................................... 157 1.2 Precautions ........................................................... 199
1.6.2 Inspection of reversing radar probe .................. 158 2 Technical parameters ............................................... 199
2 Rearview Camera System ....................................... 159 3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting..................... 199
2.1 System overview .................................................. 159 3.1 The radio has no sound output in working ........... 199
2.2 Fault symptoms and troubleshooting ................... 159 3.2 The radio is not working ...................................... 200
2.2.1 Rearview camera display not working.............. 159 3.3 Station signals can't be received ........................... 200
2.2.2 Rearview camera not working .......................... 160 4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code................................ 201
2.3 Removal and installation of rearview camera ...... 160 4.1 DTC fault code list ............................................... 201
68 Anti-theft Security System .................................... 162 4.2 U014000 Loss of Communication with BCM
1 Anti-theft Alarm System ......................................... 162 U015500 Loss of Communication with MIU U010000
1.1 Brief introduction ................................................ 162 Loss of Communication with EMS U100700 Bus
1.1.1 General descriptions ......................................... 162 Closed U100700 CAN Bus Closed Fault U100587
1.1.2 Overview of anti-theft system functions ........... 163 Network Management Fault B160009 CAN Signal Line
1.2 Technical parameters ........................................... 163 Fault ........................................................................... 202
1.3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting ................. 163 4.3 U170187 Bluetooth Communication Fault .......... 206
1.4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ............................ 164 4.4 B111717 Battery Overvoltage B111716 Battery
1.4.1 DTC Fault Code List ........................................ 164 Undervoltage .............................................................. 207
1.4.2 U007300 PCAN Bus Closed U100700 BCAN Bus 5 Overview of Audio Visual System .......................... 210
Closed U010000 Loss of Communication with EMS 6 Removal and installation of the DA machine/AUDIO
U010100 Loss of Communication with TCU U015100 machine ...................................................................... 210
Loss of Communication with SDM U015500 Loss of 7 USB/HDMI Interface .............................................. 212
Communication with MIU (ICM) U016400 Loss of 7.1 Overview of USB interface and HDMI interface . 212
Communication with ACC U024500 Loss of 7.2 Removal and installation of the HAMI interface . 212
Communication with EHU (HUM) U015100 Loss of 7.3 Removal and installation of the USB interface .... 212
Communication with SDM U100587 Network 8 Speaker .................................................................... 213
Management Limp B111651 EOL Not Programmed 8.1 Removal and installation of the tweeter ............... 213

-III-
X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8.2 Removal and installation of the front door full-range Short to Ground B100912 Passenger Peripheral
speaker ....................................................................... 213 Acceleration Sensor Short to Power Supply .............. 237
8.3 Removal and installation of the rear door full-range 3.5 B10101C Driver Airbag Bonding B101011 Driver
speaker ....................................................................... 214 Airbag Short to Ground B101012 Driver Airbag Short to
9 Radio Antenna ........................................................ 215 Power Supply B10101B Driver Airbag Resistance too
9.1 Overview of DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna High B10101A Driver Airbag Resistance too Low .... 240
................................................................................... 215 3.6 B10111C Passenger Airbag Bonding B101111
9.2 Removal and installation of the antenna amplifier Passenger Airbag Short to Ground B101112 Passenger
................................................................................... 217 Airbag Short to Power Supply B10111B Passenger
9.3 Overhaul of DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna Airbag Resistance too High B10111A Passenger Airbag
................................................................................... 218 Resistance too Low .................................................... 243
10 Steering Wheel...................................................... 219 3.7 B10121C Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Bonding
10.1 Functions of multi-functional steering wheel B101211 Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Short to Ground
buttons ....................................................................... 219 B101212 Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Short to Power
10.2 Removal and installation of the multi-functional Supply B10121B Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner
steering wheel buttons ............................................... 220 Resistance too High B10121A Driver Seat Belt
11. Removal and installation of the multi-functional Pre-tensioner Resistance too Low .............................. 245
display........................................................................ 220 3.8 B10131C Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Bonding
70 AVN Navigation System ....................................... 222 B101311 Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Short to
1 Brief introduction ................................................... 222 Ground B101312 Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner
2 Technical parameters .............................................. 222 Short to Power Supply B10131B Passenger Seat Belt
3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting .................... 223 Pre-tensioner Resistance too High B10131A Passenger
3.1 Navigation voice cannot be heard........................ 223 Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Resistance too Low .............. 248
3.2 GPS mark no display ........................................... 223 3.9 B10141C Driver Side Airbag Bonding B101411
4 Overview of AVN Navigation System .................... 224 Driver Side Airbag Short to Ground B101412 Driver
5 Removal and installation of the AVN navigation ... 225 Side Airbag Short to Power Supply B10141B Driver
6 DVD Navigation Antenna....................................... 226 Side Airbag Resistance too High B10141A Driver Side
6.1 Removal and installation of GPS antenna assembly Airbag Resistance too Low ........................................ 250
................................................................................... 226 3.10 B10151C Passenger Side Airbag Bonding B101511
72 Protection System ................................................. 228 Passenger Side Airbag Short to Ground B101512
1 Brief introduction ................................................... 228 Passenger Side Airbag Short to Power Supply B10151B
2 Technical parameters .............................................. 229 Passenger Side Airbag Resistance too High B10151A
3 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ............................... 230 Passenger Side Airbag Resistance too Low ............... 253
3.1 DTC fault code list............................................... 230 3.11 B10161C Passenger Air Curtain Bonding B101611
3.2 B100049 ECU Internal Fault B100155 ECU Passenger Air Curtain Short to Ground B101612
Configuration Error U007300 CAN Bus Fault .......... 233 Passenger Air Curtain Short to Power Supply B10161B
3.3 B10024A Incorrect Installation or Initialization Fault Passenger Air Curtain Resistance too High B10161A
of Driver Peripheral Sensor B100264 Reliability Fault Passenger Air Curtain Resistance too Low ................ 255
of Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B100296 3.12 B10171C Driver Air Curtain Bonding B101711
Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Damaged Driver Air Curtain Short to Ground B101712 Driver Air
B100286 Communication Fault of Driver Peripheral Curtain Short to Power Supply B10171B Driver Air
Acceleration Sensor B10081C Driver Peripheral Curtain Resistance too High B10171A Driver Air
Acceleration Sensor Bonding B100811 Driver Curtain Resistance too Low ....................................... 258
Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Short to Ground 3.13 B10201C Driver Seat Belt Buckle Bonding
B100812 Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Short to B102012 Driver Seat Belt Buckle Short to Power
Power Supply............................................................. 234 Supply ........................................................................ 260
3.4 B10034A Incorrect Installation or Initialization Fault 3.14 B10211C Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Bonding
of Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B100364 B102112 Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Short to Power
Reliability Fault of Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Supply ........................................................................ 262
Sensor B100386 Communication Fault of Passenger 3.15 B103414 Crash Output Short to Ground or Open
Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B100396 Passenger B103412 Output Short to Power Supply .................... 265
Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Damaged B10091C 3.16 U300317 power supply voltage is too high, and
Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Bonding U300316 power supply voltage is too low. ................ 267
B100911 Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor 3.17 B105000 Exploded in Frontal Crash B105100

-IV-
X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Exploded in Side Crash ............................................. 269 5.8.1 Brief introduction .............................................. 295
3.18 B105200 Crash Counter Maximizes .................. 270 5.8.2 Removal and installation of the side air curtain 296
3.19 U010000 Loss of Communication with EMS 5.9 Crash sensor ......................................................... 297
U015500 Loss of Communication with Instrument 5.9.1 Brief introduction .............................................. 297
U100400 Vehicle Speed Information Invalid U100500 5.9.2 Removal and installation of side crash sensor... 298
Airbag Warning Light Error U015100 Airbag Offline 5.10 Removal and installation of the front passenger seat
................................................................................... 270 occupancy sensor ....................................................... 299
4 Seat Belt.................................................................. 273 73 Air Conditioning System ....................................... 300
4.1 Brief introduction ................................................ 273 1 Brief introduction .................................................... 300
4.1.1 Pay attention to safety regulations of the seat belt 1.1 Repair instructions for vehicle air conditioning
retractor...................................................................... 273 system ........................................................................ 300
4.1.2 Disposal of seat belt retractor ........................... 274 1.2 Instructions for R-134a Refrigerant ..................... 300
4.2 Overview of seat belt ........................................... 275 1.3 Instructions for refrigerant oil .............................. 300
4.3 Removal and installation of the front seat belt 2 Check and Diagnosis ............................................... 302
assembly .................................................................... 276 2.1 Air conditioning system pressure too high ........... 302
4.4 Removal and installation of front seat belt buckle 2.2 Air conditioning system pressure too low ............ 303
assembly .................................................................... 277 2.3 Air conditioning cannot refrigerate ...................... 303
4.5 Removal and installation of the height adjuster... 279 2.4 Compressor abnormal sound ................................ 304
4.6 Removal and installation of the rear seat belt 2.5 Cooling air not continuous ................................... 304
assembly .................................................................... 280 3 Technical parameters ............................................... 305
4.7 Removal and installation of the rear central seat belt 4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code................................ 306
assembly .................................................................... 281 4.1 DTC fault code list ............................................... 306
4.8 Removal and installation of the rear double buckle 4.2 B130114 Evaporator Temperature out of Range .. 306
assembly .................................................................... 284 4.3 B133314 Mode Motor Open or Short Fault ......... 309
4.9 Removal and installation of the rear single buckle 4.4 B132914 Temperature Motor Open or Short Fault
assembly .................................................................... 284 .................................................................................... 312
4.10 Seat belt: Check ................................................. 285 4.5 B133614 Internal and External Circulation Motors
4.10.1 Inspection of seat belt appearance .................. 285 Open or Short Fault .................................................... 316
4.10.2 Function test of seat belt retractor (locking 4.6 U010000 EMS Communication Loss U014000
function) .................................................................... 286 BCM Communication Loss U100700 Bus Closed..... 318
4.10.3 Visual inspection of seat belt buckle............... 287 4.7 U300317 Battery Overvoltage U300317 Battery
4.10.4 Function test of seat belt buckle ..................... 287 Undervoltage B134011 Reference Voltage Short ....... 320
4.10.5 Check of fixture and fixing point .................... 287 5 Electric Digital Display Air Conditioning ............... 323
5 Side Airbag ............................................................. 288 5.1 Overview of Functions of the Electric Digital
5.1 System overview .................................................. 288 Display Air Conditioning Adjuster............................. 323
5.1.1 Observe the security precautions for airbag 5.2 Electric digital display air conditioning–Passenger
operation. ................................................................... 288 zone ............................................................................ 324
5.12 Disposal of the airbag controller ........................ 289 6 Heater Evaporator Assembly................................... 325
5.2 Overview of airbag .............................................. 289 6.1 Removal and installation of the heater evaporator
5.3 Removal and installation of airbag controller...... 290 assembly ..................................................................... 325
5.4 Driver airbag ........................................................ 291 6.2 Disassembly of the heater evaporator assembly... 329
5.4.1 Brief introduction.............................................. 291 6.3 Breakdown overview of heater evaporator .......... 334
5.4.2 Removal and installation of the driver airbag ... 291 6.4 Breakdown overview of air intake chamber......... 335
5.5 Clock spring......................................................... 292 7 Removal and installation of air intake chamber
5.5.1 Brief introduction.............................................. 292 assembly ..................................................................... 336
5.5.2 Removal and installation of clock spring.......... 293 8 Control System ........................................................ 337
5.6 Front passenger airbag ......................................... 294 8.1 Removal and installation of the air conditioning
5.6.1 Brief introduction.............................................. 294 controller .................................................................... 337
5.6.2 Removal and installation of the front passenger 8.2 Removal and installation of mode motor ............. 338
airbag ......................................................................... 294 8.3 Removal and installation of cooling/heating motor
5.7 Side airbag ........................................................... 295 .................................................................................... 338
5.7.1 Brief introduction.............................................. 295 8.4 Removal and installation of circulation motor ..... 339
5.7.2 Removal and installation of side airbag ............ 295 8.5 Removal and installation of pressure switch ........ 341
5.8 Side air curtain ..................................................... 295 8.6 Removal and installation of blower motor ........... 341

-V-
X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8.7 Removal and installation of speed control module 1 Brief introduction .................................................... 391
................................................................................... 342 2 Technical parameters ............................................... 391
8.8 Evaporator temperature sensor ............................ 342 3 Overview of network communication system ......... 392
9. Distribution System ............................................... 343 4 CAN bus system...................................................... 392
9.1 Removal and installation of front defroster air duct 5 LIN bus system ....................................................... 393
................................................................................... 343 6 K-Line ..................................................................... 394
9.2 Removal and installation of the center air vent duct 75 Attachment Device ................................................ 395
................................................................................... 344 1 Reminder ................................................................. 395
9.3 Removal and installation of rear air duct ............. 345 1.1 Brief introduction ................................................. 395
9.4 Removal and installation of air conditioning air filter 1.2 Driver side seat belt switch .................................. 395
element ...................................................................... 346 1.3 Front passenger side seat belt switch ................... 395
9.5 Removal and installation of side air vent............. 348 1.4 Ignition switch...................................................... 396
9.6 Removal and installation of center vent .............. 348 2 Cigarette lighter....................................................... 396
9.7 Removal and installation of the defrost cover plate 2.1 Brief introduction ................................................. 396
................................................................................... 349 2.2 Cigarette lighter seat ............................................ 396
9.8 Ventilation grille .................................................. 351 3. USB cable .............................................................. 397
9.8.1 Inspection of ventilation grille .......................... 351 4. Multimedia interface cable ..................................... 397
9.8.2 Removal and installation of ventilation grille ... 351 5. Horn System ........................................................... 398
10 Pipeline System .................................................... 352 5.1 Brief introduction ................................................. 398
10.1 Brief introduction............................................... 352 5.2 Check and Diagnosis ............................................ 398
10.2 Overview of piping system ................................ 353 5.2.1 Speaker not sounding ........................................ 398
10.3 Air conditioning compressor.............................. 354 5.3 Removal and installation of speaker .................... 399
10.3.1 Overview ........................................................ 354 5.4 Horn switch .......................................................... 399
10.3.2 Installation Suggestions for Air Conditioning
Compressor ................................................................ 354
10.3.3 Removal and installation of compressor assembly
................................................................................... 355
10.3.4 Compressor clutch .......................................... 358
10.3.5 Removal and installation of compressor clutch
................................................................................... 359
10.3.6 Inspection of compressor clutch disc .............. 363
10.3.7 Compressor clutch plate run-in ....................... 363
10.4 Removal and installation of condenser .............. 363
10.5 Removal and installation of heater core ............ 366
10.6 Removal and installation of evaporation core ... 370
10.7 Removal and installation of low-pressure pipe .. 374
10.8 Removal and installation of low-pressure hose . 375
10.9 Removal and installation of high-pressure hose 377
10.10 Removal and installation of high-pressure pipe378
10.11 Removal and installation of expansion valve .. 382
10.12 Air conditioning receiver-drier ........................ 383
10.13 Service interface valve core ............................. 386
10.13.1 Brief introduction.......................................... 386
10.13.2 Removal and installation of service interface
valve core................................................................... 386
11 Inspection of Condensate Water Discharge Hose . 387
12 Refrigerant ............................................................ 388
12.1 Refrigerant recovery .......................................... 388
12.2 Refrigeration system vacuum ............................ 388
12.3 Refrigerant filling .............................................. 389
13 Filling Quantity..................................................... 390
13.1 Air conditioning refrigerant ............................... 390
13.2 Air conditioning refrigerant oil .......................... 390
74 Network Communication System ......................... 391

-VI-
X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

60 Power Distribution
1 Brief Introduction
Distribution system is the center for power supply and power distribution of electrical equipment on-board, which
comprises the following components:
 Battery: to convert electric energy produced by the on-board generator to chemical energy for storage and later to
convert the chemical energy to electric energy for use.
 Battery cable: battery positive cable connects battery positive terminal with generator and starter; Battery negative
cable connects battery negative terminal with vehicle body.
 Front compartment electrical box: a kind of safety device located next to the battery in the engine compartment, and to
distribute electric energy to various equipment and to provide overload protection.
 Instrument panel electrical box: a kind of safety device on the left side of the instrument panel lower steering column,
and to distribute electric energy to various equipment and to provide overload protection.

2 Technical Parameters
Torque
Name Specification Grade Tools
Nm
10mm Hexagon
Fixing bolt of battery tray M8×1.5×16 8.8 14~16
Sleeve
10mm Hexagon
Fixing nut of battery negative terminal M6×1.0 — 6~10
Sleeve
13mm Hexagon
Fixing nut of battery positive terminal M8×1.25 — 6~10
Sleeve
13mm Hexagon
Fixing bolt of battery pressure plate M8×1.25 — 14~16
Sleeve
8mm Hexagon
Fixing bolt of front compartment relay box M6×1.0×25 8.8 6~10
Sleeve
8mm Hexagon
Instrument panel electric box fixing bolt M6×1.0×25 8.8 6~10
Sleeve

3 Battery

Danger

Risk of injury! Please note the warnings and safety regulations.

Note

To avoid damage to the battery or the vehicle, please pay attention to the instructions on the battery label.

3.1 Battery type


This vehicle is equipped with a 12V battery in the engine compartment. It is a type of maintenance-free battery with liquid
electrolytes (wet charged battery).

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution 1


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Note

 Do not remove the label or add distilled water. Please note the chapters on battery testing.
 Replace the battery if it is damaged.

3.2 Precautions for handling vehicle battery


Recognition and avoidance of dangers
It is dangerous in the process of handling battery. These dangers can be avoided if the precautions for handling vehicle
battery and the warnings on the battery are observed.

Note

 Untrained personnel (e.g. apprentices, trainees etc.) may only work on batteries when supervised by a vehicle
mechanic/chief mechanic or a vehicle electrician/chief electrician.
 Acid liquid is highly corrosive. Electrolytes may cause harmful injury if the battery has not been handled correctly.
Therefore, a suitable reactant that can be used for diluting acid erosion must be available. For example, soap
solution is a kind of suitable reactant.
 Electrolytes leaking from the battery may cause skin burns, acid corrosion and rust on the vehicle. In addition, it
may also damage the relevant safety components in the vehicle.
 In the static state during charging and after charging, the gas generated is explosive. In extreme cases, gas escaped
due to mishandling of the battery may cause explosion.
 When repairing the battery, avoid sparks or open flames due to grinding, welding or cutting operations; touch the
vehicle body to discharge the static electricity before removing the battery.
 Only work on batteries in well ventilated and suitable space.
 Scrap disposal: Old batteries are a special type of waste. It can only be disposed of in suitable collecting place
according to the conditions specified by laws and regulations.
 Do not place the tools on the battery, so as to avoid short circuit.
 Exposure to open flames, sparks or flakes is prohibited.Do not smoke when operating on the battery.
 The battery must be kept far away from the children.
 Do not tilt the battery, or else the acid will flow out from the air outlet.
 Always wear gloves and goggles when working on the battery.

3.3 Inspection of battery

Danger

 Risk of injury! Please note the Warnings and Safety Procedures.


 To avoid damage to the battery or the vehicle, please pay attention to the instructions on the battery label.

3.3.1 Battery inspection method


Inspect the battery with the following methods:
1. Visual inspection: external condition, connection and position of the battery.
2. Battery load test: to use a battery tester with printer.

2 Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Vehicle start test: voltage test at the start of the engine.


4. Charging system test: conducted with the engine running to test the battery voltage to see whether the charging system is
normal.
5. Battery static voltage test: to decide whether it is necessary to replace the battery.

3.3.2 Visual inspection

Danger

Risk of personal injury! Please note the Warnings and Safety Procedures.
Items for visual inspection before comprehensive testing: external condition, connection and position of the battery.

Note

 Failure to secure the battery properly or long-time vibration may damage the internal grid and the housing of
battery, shorten the lifespan and result in risk of explosion.
 Check whether the battery is secured, and tighten the fixing bolt with the specified tightening torque if necessary.

Visual inspection:
 Whether the battery housing is damaged.If damaged, replace the battery accordingly.
 Damaged battery housing may cause acid to leak, which may cause serious damage to the vehicle.Parts that have come
into contact with the electrolyte should be treated with electrolyte diluent or soap solution promptly.
 Whether the battery electrode (wire connector) is damaged. If any battery terminal is damaged, decide to replace the
battery or not according to the damage extent.
 If the battery electrode is damaged, good contact with the battery terminals cannot be guaranteed. Please refer to the
corresponding vehicle maintenance manual when connecting the battery terminals.
 Failure to connect or tighten the battery terminal properly may cause fire on the wire or malfunction of the electrical
equipment, so the safe operation of vehicle cannot be guaranteed.

3.3.3 Battery load test


To accurately know about the state of the battery and to decide whether it is necessary to replace the battery, conduct battery
load test.
Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required:

Digital battery tester

Preconditions:

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution 3


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1. Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.


2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
3. Disconnect the positive terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 8 .

Danger

 Risk of personal injury! Please note the Warnings and Safety Procedures.
 The battery must be tested individually and never test the battery in series.

Tips

 When the ambient temperature is close to 21 ℃, the test is the most accurate.
 If the test temperature is between 4 ℃ to 21 ℃, a reduction of 6 ℃ will raise the voltage by 0.1V; if the test
temperature is between 21 ℃ and 37 ℃, an increase of 6 ℃, will lower the voltage by 0.1V.

Test procedure
1. Connect the red terminal of the digital battery tester to the positive terminal of the battery.
2. Connect the black terminal of the digital battery tester to the negative terminal of the battery.
3. Press the digital battery tester load switch, hold for 10 seconds, and read the data.

Tips
Load switch cannot be kept on for 15 seconds; otherwise, it may damage the digital battery tester.
4. Read the data, and turn off the load switch.
5. Remove the digital battery tester terminal which connects the battery .

Note

During the load test, the digital battery tester should not overheat, and the interval between tests should be at least 2
minutes. Otherwise, the indicator of digital battery tester darkens.

Result analysis for battery load test

Tips
 As in load test the battery load is heavy, battery voltage drops.
 Conduct the test only once, as repeated tests may cause incorrect results.
 After the test, the battery will remain in a low voltage value for a long time.

Test result of battery tester Measures to be taken


GOOD Battery is OK
WEAK Charge the battery and re-test

4 Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Test result of battery tester Measures to be taken


BAD Replace battery

3.3.4 Vehicle start test


Tips
As for the vehicle start test, test the voltage when the engine is started.

Preconditions:

Note

Do not disconnect the battery cables during the test, but the whole vehicle circuit should be well connected.

1. Connect the red terminal of the digital battery tester to the positive terminal of the battery.
2. Connect the black terminal of the digital battery tester to the negative terminal of the battery.

Test procedure
Start the engine and keep running for 15 minutes. Observe the voltage readouts on the digital battery tester.

Note

When the test is started, do not press the load switch of the digital battery tester.

Test results
The voltage readout of the digital battery tester should be at least 9V.

Tips

If the display voltage is lower than 9V, charge the battery and re-test. If voltage tested for the second time is still lower than
9V, then the battery is damaged; replace the battery.

3.3.5 Test for vehicle charging system


Tips
Test for the charging system is conducted with the engine running to test the battery voltage to see whether the charging
system is normal.
Preconditions:

Note

Do not disconnect the battery cables during the test, but the whole vehicle circuit should be well connected.

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution 5


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1. Start the engine for 10-15min.


2. Shut down the engine
3. With the ignition ON, turn on all the electrical equipment and discharge the battery for just 1 minute.
4. Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
5. Connect the red terminal of the digital battery tester to the positive terminal of the battery.
6. Connect the black terminal of the digital battery tester to the negative terminal of the battery.

Test procedure
Start the engine, keep running at an idle speed of 1200-1500rpm and observe voltage displayed on digital battery tester.

Note

When the test is started, do not press the load switch of the digital battery tester.

Test results
The voltage readout of the digital battery tester should be between 13.5V-15.5V.

Tips

 If the voltage readout is lower than 13.5V, it means that the battery or the charging system is damaged, and you need to
re-test the charging system after the battery load test is completed.
 If the voltage readout is higher than 15.5V, it means the charging system is damaged. Repair or replace the generator.

3.3.6 Test of battery static voltage

Danger

Risk of personal injury! Please note the Warnings and Safety Procedures.

Tips

The battery static voltage test can be used to determine whether the battery of the stopped or stored vehicles needs
re-charging.

Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required:


 Handheld multimeter Testing conditions:
Inspection Condition:
The battery is neither charged nor discharged for at least two days (i.e. the vehicle has not been started for the past two
days).
Measure the static voltage of the battery with a handheld multimeter, and the measurement results are as follows:
Test result of battery tester Measures to be taken
Static voltage ≥ 12.5 Battery voltage normal
11 ≤ static voltage ≤ 12.5 Charge the battery

6 Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Measurement values (V) Measures to be taken


Static voltage ≤ 11 Charge and then check the battery.

3.4 Charge the battery

Danger

Risk of injury! Please note the Warnings and Safety Procedures.

Note

 For operation of the battery charger, please refer to its instructions.


 Please pay attention to notices indicated on battery label to avoid damage of the battery.
 When the battery is damaged, decide to replace the battery or not according to its damage extent.
 When charging the battery, pay attention to select correct charging mode on the charger, or otherwise incorrect
charging mode would affect performances of the battery.

3.5 Battery cable


3.5.1 Disconnection and connection of battery negative cable
Disconnect

Danger

Risk of injury! Please note the warnings and safety regulations.

Note

To avoid damage to the battery or the vehicle, please pay attention to the instructions on the battery label.

1. Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.


2. Loosen the fixing nut -Arrow- on the battery negative cable and
remove the negative cable component -1-.
Nut - Arrow- specification:M6×1.0
Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 10 Nm
Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution 7


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Connect
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

3.5.2 Disconnection and connection of battery positive cable


Disconnect

Danger

Risk of injury! Please note the warnings and safety regulations.

Note

To avoid damage to the battery or the vehicle, please pay attention to the instructions on the battery label.
1. Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
3. Press the fixing clip -Arrow- and remove cover of fuse box -1- on the
battery.

4. Loosen the fixing nut -Arrow- and disconnect the positive cable
terminal -1- of the battery.
Nut - Arrow- specification:M8×1.25
Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 10 Nm
Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 13mm hexagon sleeve

8 Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Connect
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

3.6 Removal and installation of battery


Removal

Danger

Risk of injury! Please note the warnings and safety regulations.

Note

To avoid damage to the battery or the vehicle, please pay attention to the instructions on the battery label.

Tips

 When removing the battery, first remove the negative cable, and then remove the positive cable.
 When installing the battery, first connect the positive cable, then the negative cable.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.


2. Disconnect the positive terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 8 .
3. Unscrew the fixing nut -Arrow- of the battery pressure plate, and
remove the battery pressure plate -1-.
Nut - Arrow- specification:M8×1.25
Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 14 - 16 Nm
Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 13mm hexagon sleeve
4. Take out the battery.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
1. When installing, install battery positive cable before battery negative cable.
2. Check whether the battery is securely installed.

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution 9


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Tips
Insecure installation or fixation of the battery may lead to following risks

 Insecure installation could lead to collision and trigger safety accident.


 Oscillation as the battery is not securely installed will damage the battery and battery box separator and shorten
service life of the battery.
 Incorrect mounting will damage the battery housing (there may be leakage of acid which can cause serious damage).

4. Removal and installation of the battery positive fuse box


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.

Note

Disconnect and connect the battery cables according to the regulations in the Maintenance Manual.
2. Disconnect the positive terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 8 .
3. Unscrew fixing nuts-Arrow A- and Arrow B- of main fuse box,
remove wiring terminal and take out the main fuse box-1-.
Nut -Arrow A- specification:M8×1.25
Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 6 - 10 Nm
Nut -Arrow A- tool: 13mm hexagon sleeve
Nuts - Arrow B - Specifications:M5×0.8
Nut -Arrow B- tightening torque: 4 - 6 Nm
Nut -Arrow B- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

10 Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5 Removal and installation of the front compartment electrical box


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.

Note

It is necessary to disconnect and connect the battery cables according to the regulations in the Maintenance Manual.
2. Press the fixing clip-1- of front compartment electrical box upper
cover, and remove the front compartment electrical box cover-2-.

3. Unscrew the fixing nut -Arrow- of the front compartment electrical


box and remove the wire from the connecting stud.
Nut - Arrow- specification:M8×1.25
Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 10 Nm
Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 13mm hexagon sleeve

4. Disengage fixing clip -Arrow- of front compartment electrical box-1-


and remove it from its fixing support.

Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution 11


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Press locking clip -Arrow-, disengage harness -2- from front


compartment electrical box-1- and remove the front compartment
electrical box.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

12 Repair Group 60 - Power Distribution


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

62 Instrument Cluster
1 Brief Introduction
1.1 General descriptions
The vehicle model applies electronic instrument cluster located in front of the driver and above the steering column. Alarm
or operation information is obtained with sensor or other systems and indicated on the instrument cluster. The instrument
cluster consists of engine coolant thermometer, engine tachometer, trip computer multifunctional screen, speedometer, fuel
gauge, indicator, warning light, etc.
Trip computer multifunctional screen may indicate fault information of the vehicle.
The instrument cluster communicates with all systems through CAN bus.

1.2 Display information of instrument cluster


Instrument cluster

1 - Coolant thermometer 2 - Tachometer


3 - Parking brake (hand brake) warning light 4 - Position indicator
5 - Low beam indicator 6 - High beam indicator
7 - Left turn signal lamp 8 - Low engine oil pressure warning light

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster 13


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9 - ABS Failure Warning light 10 - Engine fault warning light


11 - Charging indicator 12 - Low brake fluid level/brake system fault warning light
13 - Right steering indicator 14 - Electric power steering system warning light
15 - ESP OFF (switched off) indicator 16 - ESP start indicator/fault warning light
17 - Start-stop system fault warning light (reserved) 18 - Working indicator of start stop system (reserved)
19 - Vehicle speed signal 20 - Fuel gauge
21 - Low fuel level warning light 22 - Engine immobilizer indicator
23 - Front passenger’s seat belt not tied warning light 24 - Body anti-theft indicator
25 - Multi-functional screen 26 - Tire pressure monitoring system/ (TPMS) tire pressure
fault warning light
27 - Airbag fault warning light 28 - Cruise control indicator
29 - Engine compartment/trunk/four doors not closed 30 - Transmission fault warning light
warning light
31 - Indicator for rear fog light 32 - Indicator for front fog light
33 - Unfastened warning light of driver seat belt 34 - High coolant temperature waning lamp

1.3 Description of indicator information on instrument cluster


Alarm light
No. Alarm indication State Control logic
The warning light lights up when handbrake is
3 Parking brake (hand brake) warning light Red
not released.
It indicates that the position lamp is turned on.
4 Position indicator Green When the position lamp is turned on, this
indicator will go on.
When the low beam is turned on, this indicator
5 High beam indicator Blue
will go on.
When the high beam is turned on, this indicator
6 Low beam indicator Green
will go on.
The indicator flashes when left turn signal or
hazard warning light is connected; when the
7 Left turn signal lamp Green indicator flashes faster than usual, it indicates
fault of the left turn signal circuit or damage of
its bulb.
It indicates low oil pressure when lights up after
8 Low engine oil pressure warning light Red
start
9 ABS Failure Warning light Yellow It indicates fault of ABS system when lights up.
It indicates fault of engine when lights up after
10 Engine fault warning light Yellow
start.
It indicates fault of charging system when lights
11 Charging indicator Red
up after start.
Low brake fluid level/brake system fault It indicates low brake liquid level when lights up
12 Red
warning light without LCD display.
The indicator flashes when right turn signal or
hazard warning light is connected; when the
13 Right steering indicator Green indicator flashes faster than usual, it indicates
fault of the right turn signal circuit or damage of
its bulb.

14 Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

No. Alarm indication State Control logic


Electric power steering system warning It indicates fault of electric power steering
14 Yellow
light (yellow) system when lights up.
15 ESP OFF (switched off) indicator Yellow It indicates ESP is switched off when lights up.
If ESP indicator flashes in running, it indicates
16 ESP start indicator/fault warning light Yellow ESP system is working. If ESP indicator is
constantly on, it indicates ESP system is at fault.
When the start-stop system does not meet the
Start-stop system fault warning light
17 Yellow conditions or the start-stop system is in fault,
(reserved)
this warning light will go on.
This indicator indicates the state of start-stop
Working indicator (reserved) of start stop
18 Green system. When start-stop system is turned on, this
system
indicator will go on.
If this warning light does not go out after the
self-inspection or this warning light comes on
21 Low fuel level warning light Yellow when the vehicle is running, it means that the
remaining fuel is insufficient. In such case,
please add the fuel in time.
If the anti-theft authentication of engine fails,
22 Engine immobilizer indicator Red this indicator will always be lit, and then the
engine can’t be started up.
Front passenger’s seat belt not tied Flashing indicates actuation of alarm conditions
23 Red
warning light with audible alarm.
Anti-theft warning light flashes when anti-theft
24 Body anti-theft indicator Red
status is entered.
If the tire pressure system is in fault, this
Tire pressure alarm/TPMS system fault
26 Yellow indicator will be always lit after flashing for 60
waning lamp
seconds.
It indicates fault of air bag system when lights
27 Airbag fault warning light Red
up.
When the cruising system is activated, this
28 Cruise indicator Green
indicator will always be lit.
It indicates at least one of the two door covers is
Engine compartment/trunk/four doors
29 Red not closed, as shown in graphical indication on
not closed warning light
LCD screen.
30 Transmission fault warning light Yellow It indicates fault of transmission when lights up.
If front fog light indicator lights up after rear fog
31 Indicator for rear fog light Yellow light switch is switched on, it indicates the front
fog light is on.
If front fog light indicator lights up after front
32 Indicator for front fog light Green fog light switch is switched on, it indicates the
front fog light is on.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster 15


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

No. Alarm indication State Control logic


Unfastened warning light of driver seat Flashing indicates actuation of alarm conditions
33 Red
belt with audible alarm.
High cooling water temperature warning It indicates high coolant temperature when lights
34 Red
light up.

2 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code


2.1 DTC fault code list
Fault Code Definition
U014000 Loss of communication with BCM or length error of message sent by BCM
U015100 Loss of communication with SDM or length error of message sent by SDM
U012700 Loss of communication with TPMS or length error of message sent by TPMS
U010000 Loss of communication with EMS or length error of message sent by EMS
U010100 Loss of communication with TCU or length error of message sent by TCU
U012200 Loss of communication with ESP/ABS or length error of message sent by ESP/ABS
B111716 The voltage is too low
B111717 The voltage is too high
B182011 Fuel sensor short to ground
B182012 Fuel sensor short to power supply
U007300 CAN bus is turned off.
B123100 CAN transceiver fault
B123296 Mileage data error
B120100 ABS fault light defective
B120200 Brake fault light defective
B120300 Airbag fault light defective
B120400 Engine fault light defective
B120500 Transmission fault light defective
B120600 Engine anti-theft fault light defective
B120700 Electric power steering fault light defective
U021400 Loss of communication with PEPS node
U021200 Loss of communication with ESCL node
U100587 NM Limphome

16 Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2.2 U014000 Loss of Communication with BCM or Length Error of Message Sent by BCM
U015100 Loss of Communication with SDM or Length Error of Message Sent by SDM U012700
Loss of Communication with TPMS or Length Error of Message Sent by TPMS U010000 Loss of
Communication with EMS or Length Error of Message Sent by EMS

DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
Loss of communication  BCM message (0x4A0) is  Wire fault
with BCM or length lost by 10-time double  Control unit fault
U014000 —
error of message sent period
by BCM  Power mode is RUN for 5s
Loss of communication  No response to the  Wire fault
with SDM or length message sent by airbag to  Control unit fault
U015100 —
error of message sent bus
by SDM
Loss of communication  Wire fault
with TPMS or length  Control unit fault
U012700 — —
error of message sent
by TPMS
Loss of communication  EMS message is lost for  Wire fault
with EMS or length over 15s  Control unit fault
U010000 —
error of message sent
by EMS
Loss of communication  TCU message is lost for  Wire fault
with TCU or length over 15s  Control unit fault
U010100 —
error of message sent
by TCU
Loss of communication  ESP/ABS message is lost  Wire fault
with ESP/ABS or for over 15s  Control unit fault
U012200 —
length error of message
sent by ESP/ABS
 BUS OFF node is offline  Wire fault
U007300 CAN bus is turned off. —
for two times  Control unit fault
 Transceiver error once  Wire fault
B123100 CAN transceiver fault —
 Control unit fault
Loss of communication  PEPS message is lost for  Wire fault
U021400 —
with PEPS node over 15s  Control unit fault

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster 17


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
Loss of communication  SCL message is lost for  Wire fault
U021200 —
with ESCL node over 15s  Control unit fault
 NM Limphome symbolic  Wire fault
U100587 NM Limphome —
position 1  Control unit fault
Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect the connector T32a of the instrument cluster and check the connector T32a for crack and abnormality, and
check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check whether electrical box fuses FB41 (5A) and FB24 (7.5A) of the instrument panel are blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 3.
3. With the ignition under ON status, check whether the voltage between
pin T32a/3 of the instrument cluster connector and the body grounding
is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

18 Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the voltage
between pin T32a/2 of the instrument cluster connector and the body
grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Check whether the wire between pin T32a/1 of the instrument cluster
connector and body grounding is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 6.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster 19


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. Disconnect the body controller connector T40a and check whether


wires between pins T40a/36 and T40a/37 of the body controller
connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

7. Disconnect the airbag controller connector T32b and check whether


wires between pins T32b/2 and T32b/17 of the airbag controller
connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

20 Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8. Disconnect the engine control unit connector T112 and check whether
wires between pins T112/17 and T112/1 of the engine control unit
connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of the body controller
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 9.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

9. Disconnect connector T24a of the automatic transmission control unit


and check whether wires between pins T24a/7 and T24a/17 of the
automatic transmission control unit connector and pins T40a/9 and
T40a/8 of the body controller connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 10.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster 21


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

10. Disconnect ABS control unit connector T38b and check whether
wires between pins T38b/14 and T38b/26 of the ABS control unit
connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of the body controller connector
are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

11. Check whether wires between pins T16j/11 and T16j/3 of OBD
diagnostic interface connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the
instrument cluster connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 12.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

12. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 13.
− No - Replace the instrument cluster.
13. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

22 Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2.3 B120100 ABS fault light defective


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Current is abnormal when  Wire fault
ABS fault light
B120100 — LED is ON.  Sensor Fault
defective
 Control unit fault
Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect the connector T32a of the instrument cluster and check the connector T32a for crack and abnormality, and
check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether wires between
pins T40a/36 and T40a/37 of the body controller connector and pins
T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster connector are
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster 23


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Check whether wires between pins T38b/14 and T38b/26 of ABS


controller connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of the body controller
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the instrument cluster.

2.4 B120400 Engine Fault Light Defective B120600 Engine Anti-theft Fault Light Defective
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 LED is ON  Wire fault
Engine fault light
B120400 —  Sensor Fault
defective
 Control unit fault
 Current is abnormal when  Wire fault
Engine anti-theft fault
B120600 — LED is ON.  Sensor Fault
light defective
 Control unit fault
Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect the connector T32a of the instrument cluster and check the connector T32a for crack and abnormality, and
check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

24 Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Disconnect the body controller connector T40a and check whether


wires between pins T40a/36 and T40a/37 of the body controller
connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Disconnect the engine control unit connector T112 and check whether
wires between pins T112/17 and T112/1 of the engine control unit
connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of the body controller
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the instrument cluster.

2.5 B120200 Brake fault light defective


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Current is abnormal when  Wire fault
Brake fault light
B120200 — LED is ON.  Sensor Fault
defective
 Control unit fault

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster 25


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect connector T1k of parking brake switch, check the connector T1k for crack and abnormality and check the pins
for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect instrument cluster
connector T32a and check whether the wire between pin T32a/8 of the
instrument cluster connector and pin T1k/1 of the parking brake switch
connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Check whether the pin T1k/1 of the parking brake switch connector is
short to body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

26 Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. Disconnect battery negative cable and check whether the pin T1k/1 of
the parking brake switch connector is short to the positive terminal of
the battery.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the instrument cluster.

2.6 B120500 Transmission fault light defective


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Current is abnormal when  Wire fault
Transmission fault light
B120500 — LED is ON.  Sensor Fault
defective
 Control unit fault
Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect automatic transmission control unit connector T24a, check the automatic transmission control unit connector
T24a for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
Rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster 27


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Disconnect the body controller connector T40a and check whether


wires between pins T40a/36 and T40a/37 of the body controller
connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Disconnect connector T24a of the automatic transmission control unit


and check whether wires between pins T24a/7 and T24a/17 of the
automatic transmission control unit connector and pins T40a/9 and
T40a/8 of the body controller connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the instrument cluster.

2.7 B120700 Electric power steering fault light defective


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Wire fault
Electric power steering  Current is abnormal when
B120700 —  Sensor Fault
fault light defective LED is ON.
 Control unit fault

28 Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect the connector T32a of the instrument cluster and check the connector T32a for crack and abnormality, and
check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller
connector T40a and check whether the wires between pins T40a/36 and
T40a/37 of the body controller connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15
of the combination switch connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

3. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller


connector T40a and check whether the wires between pins T40a/9 and
T40a/8 of the body controller connector and pins T20b/15 and T20b/16
of the EPS controller connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Replace the EPS controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and
its symptoms remain.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No-Replace the EPS controller.
5. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster 29


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

− No - Replace the instrument cluster.

2.8 B182011 Fuel Sensor Short to Ground B182012 Fuel Sensor Short to Power Supply
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 The data scope
calculated out is
 The circuit is short to
Fuel sensor short to invalid.
B182011 — ground and its resistance
ground  Wire fault
measured is <2Ω for 20s.
 Sensor Fault
 Control unit fault
 The data scope
calculated out is
 The circuit is short to
Fuel sensor short to invalid.
B182012 — ground and its resistance
power supply  Wire fault
measured is >1kΩ for 20s.
 Sensor Fault
 Control unit fault
Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect the connector T32a of the instrument cluster and check the connector T32a for crack and abnormality, and
check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect fuel pump connector
T4a and check whether the wires between pins T4a/1 and T4a/2 of the
fuel pump connector and pins T32a/11 and T32a/27 of the instrument
cluster connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

30 Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect battery negative cable and check whether pins T4a/1 and
T4a/2 of the fuel pump connector are short to the positive terminal of
the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

4. Check whether pins T4a/1 and T4a/2 of the fuel pump connector are
short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

5. Replace the fuel pump and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 6.
− No-Replace the fuel pump.
6. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the instrument cluster.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster 31


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2.9 B111717 Overvoltage B111716 Undervoltage


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Functions such as
odometer/oil
gauge/water
thermometer/superch
arging indication/gear
Voltage is
 Voltage is >16.2V and indication are hardly
B111717 The voltage is too high higher than the
lasts for 1s realized reliably
threshold value
under night mode
 The battery has
insufficient voltage
 Wire fault
 Control unit fault
 Functions such as
odometer/oil
gauge/water
thermometer/superch
Voltage is lower arging indication/gear
 Voltage is <8.8V and lasts
B111716 The voltage is too low than the indication are hardly
for 1s
threshold value realized reliably
under night mode
 Generator fault
 Wire fault
 Control unit fault
DTC detection step:
Make sure the battery voltage is normal before taking the following steps.
 Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
 Connect the diagnostic tester BDS to the vehicle diagnostic interface.
 Turn on the ignition.
 Read and eliminate the DTC using the diagnostic tester.
Tips
Test with the latest software.
 Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment, and turn it back on after 3-5 seconds.
 Read the DTC using the diagnostic tester.
 If DTC is detected, it indicates that faults have occurred in the car; please follow the relevant diagnostic steps. If no
DTC is detected, the fault detected earlier was sporadic.
Diagnostic steps:

Tips
After the fault is solved, verify DTC again and check whether the symptom is still present.
Check whether the battery charging circuit is normal and check whether the terminal is loose or corrosive.

32 Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

− Yes-Repair the faulty wire and tighten or clean the terminal.


− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check whether electrical box fuses FB41 (5A) and FB24 (7.5A) of the instrument panel are blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 3.
3. Check whether the battery voltage is within the normal range.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No-Overhaul or replace the battery.
4. Check whether generating voltage of the generator is normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No-Overhaul or replace the generator.
5. Disconnect the connector T32a of the instrument cluster and check the connector T32a for crack and abnormality, and
check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 6.
6. With the ignition under ON status, check whether the voltage between
pin T32a/3 of the instrument cluster connector and the body grounding
is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster 33


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the voltage
between pin T32a/2 of the instrument cluster connector and the body
grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Check whether the wire between pin T32a/1 of the instrument cluster
connector and body grounding is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 9.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

9. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the instrument cluster.

34 Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2.10 B123296 Mileage data error


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Write-in of
undefined mileage
 Internal
 Mileage data Checksum readout
B123296 Mileage data error elements
error EEPROM/ODO
defective
fault
 Control unit fault
Diagnostic steps:
1. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the instrument cluster.

2.11 B120300 Airbag fault light defective


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
Airbag fault light  Current is abnormal when  Control unit fault
B120300 —
defective LED is ON.
Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect the connector T32a of the instrument cluster and check the connector T32a for crack and abnormality, and
check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T32b/2 and T32b/17 of the airbag controller connector and
pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster connector are
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster 35


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes, find out the reasons from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the instrument cluster.

3. Removal and installation of instrument cluster


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Pull the steering wheel outwards as far as possible to make it down to its lowest position.
3. Unscrew the fixing screw of the instrument cluster trim panel -Arrow-
and remove the instrument cluster trim panel.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 4 Nm

4. Unscrew the fixing screw of the instrument cluster-Arrow-, and


remove the instrument cluster -1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

Tips
Extract the instrument cluster carefully, until the instrument cluster
connector can be removed.

5. Turn unlocking device of the connector in the direction of -Arrow-,


disconnect the connecting plug of the instrument cluster and remove the
instrument cluster -1-.

36 Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
After replacement of the instrument cluster, turn ignition to ON (not starting the engine) and configure the instrument
cluster in the items by instructions of the diagnostic tester.
Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

4. Reset trip display


1. With the ignition ON, short press ―INFO‖ button at the left of the instrument cluster after POST to switch trip information
to the relevant mode.
2. Long press ―RESET‖ button (>2s) at the right side of the instrument cluster after the relevant mode is entered to reset
subtotal mileage A, subtotal mileage B, average fuel consumption, trip time, etc.

Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster 37


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Removal and installation of the quartz clock


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Remove the middle trim panel of the instrument panel. => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Vehicle body
and painting; Instrument panel; Removal and installation of the middle trim panel assembly of the instrument panel
3. Unscrew the fixing screw of the quartz clock -Arrow-and remove the
quartz clock-1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check functions of the quartz clock after installation and adjust the quartz clock if necessary.
5. -Left button -Arrow A-: short press-adjust the minute hand
counterclockwise for one minute;
Long press-adjust the minute hand counterclockwise continuously;
-Right button -Arrow B-: short press- adjust the minute hand clockwise
for one minute;
Long press- adjust the minute hand clockwise continuously.

38 Repair Group 62 - Instrument Cluster


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

63 Vehicle Lights
1 Overview
Lights are lighting tools on the vehicle that may be classified into: interior lights and exterior lights by their different
installation positions and purposes.
The interior light includes
The interior lights consist of following parts:
 Front toplight: to provide vehicle interior front with light.
 Trunk light: to provide the trunk with light.
The exterior light includes
Exterior lights consist of following parts:
 Front combination light: to play the major roles of lighting and signaling.
 Turn signal light: to remind other road occupiers turning of the vehicle.
 Fog light: to play the roles of lighting and reminding when running in rainy and foggy weather.
 Brake light: to remind when the vehicle is speeding down or stopping.
 Reversing light: to remind reversing.
 License plate light: to light license plate of the vehicle and facilitate identification of vehicle license plate in the dark.
 Position light: to display width and length of the vehicle body at night.
 Daytime running light: to warn exterior pedestrians and exterior vehicles in daytime. (Applicable to high configuration
vehicle model only)
Bulb specification
Name Model Specification
Low beam lamp(halogen) H7 12V/55W
High beam (halogen) H1 12V/55W
Front position light and
daytime running light (high W21/5W 12V/5W
Front combination light
configuration)
Front position light (low
W5W 12V/5W
configuration)
Front turn signal lamp PY21W 12V/21W
Front fog light H11 12V/55W
Reversing light W21W 12V/21W
Rear turn signal lamp PY21W 12V/21W
Brake light P21W 12V/21W
Rear fog light P21W 12V/21W
High mounted brake lamp LED 12V/3.6W

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 39


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Name Model Specification


Trunk lamp C10W 12V/10W
License plate light W5W 12V/5W
Front dome light C5W 12V/5W
LED high
Rear position light configuration/P21/5W low 12V/5W
configuration

2 Technical Parameters
Tightening torque
Torque
Name Specification Grade Tools
Nm
Fixing screw of front toplight — — 2~3 —
10mm Hexagon
Fixing bolt of front combination light assembly M6×1.0×15 8.8 4~6
Sleeve
Fixing screw of front fog light assembly — — 2.5~3.5 —
Fixing bolt of rear combination light fixed part
— — 2.5~3.5 —
assembly
10mm Hexagon
Fixing nut of rear combination light movable part M6×1.0 — 2.5~3.5
Sleeve
Fixing screw of rear fog light assembly — — 2.5~3.5 —
Hight mounted brake lamps retaining nuts — — 2~3 —
Fixing screw of the combination switch — — 3~5 —
22mm Open
Tightening torque of reversing light switch — — 35
wrench

3 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code


3.1 DTC fault code list
Fault Code Definition
B110212 Daytime running light output short to power supply
B110214 Daytime running light output short to ground or open
B110312 Front fog light output short to power supply
B110314 Front fog light output short to ground or open
B110712 Rear fog light output short to power supply
B110714 Rear fog light output short to ground or open
B110811 Left turn signal output short to ground
B110813 Left turn signal output open
B110911 Right turn signal output short to ground
B110913 Right turn signal output open
B111911 Gearshift solenoid valve output short to ground

40 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Fault Code Definition


B111913 Gearshift solenoid valve output open
B111D11 Hazard warning switch short to ground
B111E11 Rear fog light switch short to ground
B112C11 High beam/overtaking switch short to ground
B116412 Low beam output short to power supply
B116414 Low beam output short to ground or open
B116512 High beam output short to power supply
B116514 High beam output short to ground or open
B111913 Gearshift solenoid valve output open
B111D11 Hazard warning switch short to ground
B111E11 Rear fog light switch short to ground

3.2 B116512 High Beam Output Short to Power Supply B116514 High Beam Output Short to
Ground or Open
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, high  Wire fault
High beam output short beam relay is short to  Actuator Fault
B116512 —
to power supply power supply for 200ms  Control unit fault
when the output is valid.
 With the ignition ON, high  Wire fault
High beam output short beam relay is short to  Actuator Fault
B116514 —
to ground or open ground or open for 200ms  Control unit fault
when the output is invalid.
Diagnostic steps:
1. Check whether the fuses FB15 (10A) and FB16 (10A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check the high beam relay J107 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No-Replace the high beam relay J107 and clean the terminal.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 41


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Check whether the high beam relay J107 is normal.


− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No Replace the high beam relay J107

Conditions Multimeter connecting pins Rated value


Constant state Common status 85-86 Connectivity
Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply
30-87 Connectivity
supply voltage

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and front compartment


electrical box connector T16b and check whether the wire between pin
T16b/9 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin
T40a/26 of the body controller connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

42 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T16b/9
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether the pin T16b/9 of the front compartment electrical


box connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 43


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. Disconnect left front combination light connector T10h and right


front combination light connector T10c and check whether wires
between pins T16b/7 and T16b/8 of the front compartment electrical box
connector and pin 10h/8 of the left front combination light connector
and pin 10c/8 of the right front combination light connector are
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether pins T16b/7


and T16b/8 of the front compartment electrical box connector are short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 9.

44 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether pins T16b/7 and T16b/8 of the front compartment


electrical box connector are short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 10.

10. Replace the high beam lamp and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code
and its symptoms remain.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No-Replace the high beam.
11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

3.3 B116412 Low Beam Output Short to Power Supply B116414 Low Beam Output Short to
Ground or Open
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, low  Wire fault
Low beam output short beam relay is short to  Actuator Fault
B116412 —
to power supply power supply for 200ms  Control unit fault
when the output is valid.
 With the ignition ON, low  Wire fault
Low beam output short beam relay is short to  Actuator Fault
B116414 —
to ground or open ground or open for 200ms  Control unit fault
when the output is invalid.
Diagnostic steps:
1. Check whether the fuses FB08 (10A) and FB09 (10A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 45


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check the low beam relay J105 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No-Replace the low beam relay J105 and clean the terminal.
3. Check whether the low beam relay J105 is normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No Replace the low beam relay J105.

Conditions Multimeter connecting pins Rated value


Constant state Common status 85-86 Connectivity
Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply
30-87 Connectivity
supply voltage

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and front compartment


electrical box connector T16b and check whether the wire between pin
T16b/3 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin
T40a/27 of the body controller connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

46 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T16b/3
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether the pin T16b/3 of the front compartment electrical box
connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 47


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. Disconnect left front combination light connector 10h and right front
combination light connector 10c and check whether wires between pins
T16b/2 and T16b/1 of the front compartment electrical box connector
and pin 10h/6 of the left front combination light connector and pin
10c/6 of the right front combination light connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether pins T16b/2


and T16b/1 of the front compartment electrical box connector are short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 9.

48 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether pins T16b/2 and T16b/1 of the front compartment


electrical box connector are short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 10.

10. Replace the low beam lamp and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code
and its symptoms remain.
− Yes Proceed to Step 11.
− No-Replace the low beam.
11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes, find out the reasons from other symptoms.
− No, replace the body controller.

3.4 B110312 Front Fog Light Output Short to Power Supply B110314 Front Fog Light Output
Short to Ground or Open
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, front  Wire fault
Front fog light output fog light relay is short to  Actuator Fault
B110312 —
short to power supply power supply for 200ms  Control unit fault
when the output is valid.
 With the ignition ON, front  Wire fault
Front fog light output fog light relay is short to  Actuator Fault
B110314 —
short to ground or open ground or open for 200ms  Control unit fault
when the output is invalid.
Diagnostic steps:
1. Check whether fuse FB32 (15A) of the front compartment electrical box is blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 49


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check the front fog light relay J108 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No-Replace the front fog light relay J108 and clean the terminal.
3. Check whether the front fog light relay J108 is normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No-Replace the front fog light relay J108.

Conditions Multimeter connecting pins Rated value


Constant state Common status 85-86 Connectivity
Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply
30-87 Connectivity
supply voltage

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and front compartment


electrical box connector T20d and check whether the wire between pin
T20d/3 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin
T40a/5 of the body controller connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

50 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T20d/3
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether the pin T20d/3 of the front compartment electrical


box connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 51


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. Disconnect left front fog light connector T2dd and right front fog
light connector T2zz and check whether wires between pin T18b/7 of
the front compartment electrical box connector and pin T2dd/1 of the
left front fog light connector and pin T2zz/1 of the right front fog light
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T18b/7
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 9.

52 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8. Check whether the pin T18b/7 of the front compartment electrical


box connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 10.

10. Replace the fog light and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No-Replace the fog light.
11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

3.5 B110712 Rear Fog Light Output Short to Power Supply B110714 Rear Fog Light Output Short
to Ground or Open
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, rear  Wire fault
Rear fog light output fog light relay is short to  Actuator Fault
B110712 —
short to power supply power supply for 200ms  Control unit fault
when the output is valid.
 With the ignition ON, rear  Wire fault
Rear fog light output fog light relay is short to  Actuator Fault
B110714 —
short to ground or open ground or open for 200ms  Control unit fault
when the output is invalid.

Diagnostic steps:
1. Check whether fuse FB32 (10A) of the front compartment electrical box is blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 53


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check the front fog light relay J113 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No-Replace the front fog light relay J113 and clean the terminal.
3. Check whether the front fog light relay J113 is normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No-Replace the front fog light relay J113.

Conditions Multimeter connecting pins Rated value


Constant state Common status 85-86 Connectivity
Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply
30-87 Connectivity
supply voltage

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and front compartment


electrical box connector T20d and check whether the wire between pin
T20d/5 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin
T40a/2 of the body controller connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

54 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T20d/5
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether the pin T20d/5 of the front compartment electrical


box connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 55


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. Disconnect left rear fog light connector T2bf and right rear fog light
connector T2bc and check whether wires between pin T18b/9 of the
front compartment electrical box connector and pin T2bf/1 of the left
front fog light connector and pin T2bc/1 of the right front fog light
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T18b/9
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 9.

56 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether the pin T18b/9 of the front compartment electrical box
connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 10.

10. Replace the fog light and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No-Replace the fog light.
11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

3.6 B110811 Left Turn Signal Output Short to Ground B110813 Left Turn Signal Output Open
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, left  Wire fault
Left turn signal output turn signal is short to  Actuator Fault
B110811 —
short to ground power supply for 400ms  Control unit fault
when the output is valid.
 With the ignition ON, load  Wire fault
of the left turn signal (front  Actuator Fault
turn signal, rear turn signal  Control unit fault
Left turn signal output
B110813 — or both front and rear turn
open
signals) is lost for 400ms
when the left turn signal
switch is ON.

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect left front combination light connector T10h, left rear combination light connector T6g and left rearview
mirror connector T8s and check left front combination light connector T10h, left rear combination light connector T6g and
left rearview mirror connector T8s for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 57


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.


− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller
connector T18c and check whether the wire between pin T18c/14 body
controller connector and pin T10h/9 of the left front combination light
connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Check whether the wire between pin T18c/14 of the body controller
connector and pin T6g/2 of the left rear combination light connector is
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

58 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. Check whether the wire between pin T18c/14 of the body controller
connector and pin T8s/8 of the left rearview mirror connector is
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Check whether the wire between pin T18c/14 of the body controller
connector and the body grounding is conductive.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 59


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the pin T18c/14 of the body controller connector is


short to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

7. Check whether wires between pin T10h/7 of left front combination


light connector, pin T6g/3 of left rear combination light connector, pin
T8s/7 of left rearview mirror connector and the body grounding are
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Replace the left turn signal lamp and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault
code and its symptoms remain.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 9.
− No-Replace the left turn signal.
9. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

60 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3.7 B110911 Right Turn Signal Output Short to Ground B110913 Right Turn Signal Output Open
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, right
 Wire fault
Right turn signal output turn signal is short to
B110911 —  Actuator Fault
short to ground power supply for 400ms
 Control unit fault
when the output is valid.
 With the ignition ON, load
of the right turn signal
(front turn signal, rear turn  Wire fault
Right turn signal output
B110913 — signal or both front and  Actuator Fault
open
rear turn signals) is lost for  Control unit fault
400ms when the left turn
signal switch is ON.

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect right front combination light connector T10c, right rear combination light connector T6p and right rearview
mirror connector T8h, check right front combination light connector T10c, right rear combination light connector T6p and
right rearview mirror connector T8h for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller
connector T18c and check whether the wire between pin T18c/11 of the
body controller connector and pin T10c/9 of the right front combination
light connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 61


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Check whether the wire between pin T18c/11 of the body controller
connector and pin T6p/2 of the right rear combination light connector is
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Check whether the wire between pin T18c/11 of the body controller
connector and pin T8h/8 of the right rearview mirror connector is
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

62 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin


T18c/11 of the right front combination light connector is short to the
positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether the pin T18c/11 of the body controller connector is


short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 63


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. Check whether wires between pin T10c/7 of right front combination


light connector, pin T6p/3 of right rear combination light connector, pin
T8h/7 of right rearview mirror connector pin and the body grounding are
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Replace the right turn signal lamp and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault
code and its symptoms remain.
− Yes Proceed to Step 9.
− No-Replace the right turn signal.
9. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes, find out the reasons from other symptoms.
− No, replace the body controller.

3.8 B111D11 Hazard Warning Switch Short to Ground


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON,  Wire fault
Hazard warning switch
B111D11 — hazard warning light  Actuator Fault
short to ground
switch is valid for 15s.  Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and hazard warning light switch connector T6n and check body controller
connector T40a and hazard warning light switch connector T6n for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion
and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

64 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wire between
pin T6n/2 of the hazard warning light switch connector and the body
grounding is conductive.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

3. Replace the hazard warning light switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes Proceed to Step 4.
− No-Replace the hazard warning light switch.
4. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes, find out the reasons from other symptoms.
− No, replace the body controller.

3.9 B111E11 Rear Fog Light Switch Short to Ground


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, rear  Wire fault
Rear fog light switch
B111E11 — fog light switch is valid for  Actuator Fault
short to ground
15s.  Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and light combination switch connector T12g, check body controller
connector T40a and light combination switch connector T12g for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion
and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 65


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether wires between
pins T12g/8 and T12g/9 of the light combination switch connector and
the body grounding are conductive.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

3. Replace the light combination switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes Proceed to Step 4.
− No Replacing light combination switch
4. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes, find out the reasons from other symptoms.
− No, replace the body controller.

3.10 B112C1E High Beam/Overtaking Switch Resistance Abnormal


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON,  Wire fault
High beam/overtaking
B112C11 — overtaking light switch is  Actuator Fault
switch short to ground
valid for 15s.  Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect light combination switch connector T12g, check light combination switch connector T12g for crack and
abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

66 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Check whether the pin T12g/2 of the light combination switch


connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

3. Replace the light combination switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No Replacing light combination switch
4. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

3.11 B111911 Gearshift Solenoid Valve Output Short to Ground B111913 Gearshift Solenoid
Valve Output Open
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON,
Gearshift solenoid  Wire fault
BTSI output is short to
B111911 valve output short to —  Actuator Fault
ground for 400ms when
ground  Control unit fault
the output is valid.
 With the ignition ON, load  Wire fault
Gearshift solenoid
B111913 — of BTSI is lost for 400ms  Actuator Fault
valve output open
when BTSI output is ON.  Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect AT gearshift lever connector T10f, check AT gearshift lever connector T10f for crack and abnormality and
check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 67


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller


connector T40b and check whether the wires between pins T40b/21 and
T40b/7 of the body controller connector and pins T10f/2 and T10f/4 of
AT gearshift lever connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Check whether the pins T10f/2 and T10f/4 of AT gearshift lever


connector are short to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

68 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. Check whether pins T10f/2 and T10f/4 of the AT gearshift lever


connector are short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

5. Replace the automatic transmission sensor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 6.
− No-Replace the automatic transmission sensor.
6. Replace the automatic transmission control unit, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No-Replace the automatic transmission control unit.
7. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

3.12 B110212 Daytime Running Light Output Short to Power Supply B110214 Daytime Running
Light Output Short to Ground or Open
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON,
Daytime running light daytime running light relay  Wire fault
B110212 output short to power — is short to power supply  Actuator Fault
supply for 200ms when the output  Control unit fault
is valid.
 With the ignition ON,
Daytime running light daytime running light relay  Wire fault
B110214 output short to ground — is short to ground or open  Actuator Fault
or open for 200ms when the output  Control unit fault
is invalid.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 69


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect left front combination light connector T10h and right front combination light T10c, check left front
combination light connector T10h and right front combination light T10c for crack and abnormality and check the pins for
corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller
connector T18c and check whether the wires between pins T18c/14 and
T180c/11 of the body controller connector and pin T10h/9 of the left
front combination light connector and pin T10c/9 of the right front
combination light are conductive.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable and check whether pins T18c/14


and T180c/11 of the body controller connector are short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

70 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. Check whether pins T18c/14 and T180c/11 of the body controller


connector are short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether the wires between pin T10h/9 of the left front
combination light connector, pin T10c/9 of the right front combination
light and the body grounding are conductive.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− -NO Proceed to Step 6.

6. Replace the daytime running light bulb, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No-Replace the daytime running light bulb.
7. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 71


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4 Interior Lights
4.1 Brief Introduction
The interior lights are lighting devices inside the vehicle that consist of following parts: front toplight and trunk lamp.
The power supply logic is as following:
 Front toplight: front toplight is powered by body controller and lights up or not according to position of the front
toplight switch.
 Trunk light: the trunk lamp is directly powered by the battery that lights up when trunk cover is opened and goes out
when the trunk cover is closed.

4.2 Overview of interior lights

1 - Luggage compartment light 2 - Front toplight


 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 75  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 73
 Replace the trunk lamp bulb=> Refer to page 76  Replace the front toplight bulb=> Refer to page 74

72 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.3 Front toplight


4.3.1 Removal and installation of front toplight
Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Plastic skid plate

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Pry out the front toplight cover -1- in the positon of-Arrow- with
tools.

3. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow-of the front toplight and remove the
front toplight -1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 73


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- and remove the front


toplight-1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check functions of the front toplight after installation.

4.3.2 Front fog light bulb replacement


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Pry out the front toplight cover -1- in the positon of-Arrow- with
tools.

3. Take out the front toplight bulb -1- from the fixing clip.
Model of front toplight bulb: C5W
Specification of front toplight bulb: 12V/5W

74 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Be sure to wear gloves when replacing the bulb instead of bonding the bulb directly by hands, or otherwise you may
shorten service life of the bulb or lead to damage of the bulb.
 Check functions of the front toplight after installation.

4.4 Trunk lamp


4.4.1 Removal and installation of the trunk lamp
Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Pry out the trunk lamp-1- at the position of -Arrow- with tools.

3. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the trunk lamp and


remove the trunk lamp -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check functions of the trunk lamp after installation.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 75


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.4.2 Replace the trunk lamp bulb


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Pry out the trunk lamp-1- at the position of -Arrow- with tools.

3. Extract the trunk lamp bulb -1- from the fixing clip.
Model of trunk lamp bulb: C10W
Specification of trunk lamp bulb: 12V/10w

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Be sure to wear gloves when replacing the bulb instead of bonding the bulb directly by hands, or otherwise you may
shorten service life of the bulb or lead to damage of the bulb.
 Check functions of the trunk lamp after installation.

5 Exterior Lights
5.1 Brief introduction
Exterior lights consist of followings:
 Front combination light

76 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

 Turn signal lamp


 Fog light
 Brake light
 Reversing light
 License plate light
 Position light
 Daytime running lamp

The power supply logic is as following:

 Front combination light: with the light switch to low beam position, the body controller detects the low beam ON
signal and controls the low beam relay in the front compartment electrical box; the low beam power supply is
connected and the low beam starts to work;
 Turn signal light: flip the switch of the turn signal light upward or downward, and power is supplied to the left or the
right turn signal light.
 Hazard warning light: Press the hazard warning light switch, power is supplied to all the turn signal lamps.
 Fog light: turn the fog light switch to the fog light position and power is supplied to both front and rear fog lights.
 Brake light: Press the brake pedal and power is supplied to the brake light via brake switch.
 Reversing light: With the gear selector in reverse position, turn on the reversing switch and power is supplied to the
reversing light.
 License plate light: Turn on the light switch and power is supplied to the license plate light.
 Position light: Turn on the light switch and power is supplied to the position light.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 77


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5.2 Front combination light assembly


5.2.1 Overview of front combination light assembly

1 -Low beam bulb 2 - Sealing cover


 Total: 2 (one on each side)  Used for low beam
 Replace the low beam bulb=>Refer to Page 80  Total: 2 (one on each side)
 Check, replace if necessary
3 - Sealing cover 4 - Dimming motor
 Used for position light  Total: 2 (one on each side)
 Total: 2 (one on each side)  Check, replace if necessary
 Check, replace if necessary
5 - Position light/daytime running light bulb 6 - Turn signal bulb holder
 Daytime running light (applicable to high configuration  Total: 2 (one on each side)
vehicle model only)
 Total: 2 (one on each side)  Check, replace if necessary
 Replace the position light bulb=> Refer to page 80
7 - Turn signal bulb 8 - Front combination light cover

78 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

 Total: 2 (one on each side)  Total: 2 (one on each side)


 Replace the turn signal bulb=>Refer to Page 80  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 79
9 - High beam bulb 10 - Sealing cover
 Total: 2 (one on each side)  Used for high beam
 Replace the high beam bulb=>Refer to Page 80  Total: 2 (one on each side)
 Check, replace if necessary

5.2.2 Removal and installation of front combination light assembly


Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left front combination light assembly, but may serve as a
reference for the right side.
1. Remove the front bumper component=>Vehicle Body and Painting; Repair Group:83; Exterior equipment; Removal
and installation of front bumper component.
2. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow- of the left front combination light
assembly.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M6×1.0×15
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 4 - 6 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve
3. Remove left front combination light assembly -1-.

Tips
Extract the left front combination light assembly carefully until the connecting plug of the left front combination light can be
removed.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 79


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. Disconnect the connecting plugs -Arrow A- and -Arrow B- of left


front combination light assembly and remove the front combination
light.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
1. Check whether the gap between the right front combination light assembly and the vehicle body is even.
If the gap between the right front combination light assembly and the vehicle body is uneven, align the installation position.
2. Adjust the left front combination light after installation. => General; Repair Group: 01: General information; Maintenance:
Working description: Headlamp: Check and Adjustment

5.2.3 Replace the front combination light bulb


Halogen high beam bulb: Replace
Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the high beam bulb of the right front combination light assembly,
but may serve as a reference for the left side.
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.

2. Disengage sealing cover -1- of the left high beam.

80 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Press the fixing clip in the direction of -Arrow- and remove the left
high beam bulb -1-.
Model of high beam bulb (halogen): H1
Specification of high beam bulb (halogen): 12V/55W
4. Remove the left high beam bulb component from the connector.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Be sure to wear gloves when replacing the bulb instead of bonding the bulb directly by hands, or otherwise you may
shorten service life of the bulb or lead to damage of the bulb.
 Check functions of the front combination light assembly after installation.

Halogen low beam bulb: Replace


Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the low beam bulb of the right front combination light
assembly, but may serve as a reference for the left side.
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Press the fixing clip in the direction of -Arrow- and remove cover
plate of service hole on front wheel cover fender.

Tips
 The position light may be removed inside the engine compartment
also.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 81


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Disengage sealing cover-1- of the left low beam.

4. Turn in the direction of -Arrow- and remove the low beam bulb
component -1-.
Model of low beam bulb (halogen): H7
Specification of low beam bulb (halogen): 12V/55W

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Be sure to wear gloves when replacing the bulb instead of bonding the bulb directly by hands, or otherwise you may
shorten service life of the bulb or lead to damage of the bulb.
 Check functions of the front combination light assembly after installation.

Position light bulb and daytime running light bulb: Replace

Tips
Daytime running light bulb is applicable to high configuration vehicle model only.

Removal

Tips

The instruction is only for removal and installation of position light bulb and daytime running light bulb in the left front
combination light assembly, but may serve as a reference for removal and installation of position light bulb and daytime
running light bulb in the right front combination light assembly.
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.

82 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Press the fixing clip in the direction of -Arrow- and remove cover
plate of service hole on front wheel cover fender.

Tips
The position light may be removed inside the engine compartment also.

3. Disengage sealing cover -1- of left position light bulb and daytime
running light.

4. Extract position light and daytime running light bulb component and
extract position light bulb and daytime running light bulb -1- from the
holder -2-.
Model of position light bulb W21/5W (high configuration)/W5W(low
configuration)
Specification of position light bulb: 12V/5W

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Be sure to wear gloves when replacing the bulb instead of bonding the bulb directly by hands, or otherwise you may
shorten service life of the bulb or lead to damage of the bulb.
 Check functions of the front combination light assembly after installation.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 83


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Replace the turn signal lamp bulb.


Removal
Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the front turn signal bulb of the right front combination light
assembly, but may serve as a reference for the left side.
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Turn in the direction of -Arrow- and remove the front turn signal light
holder -1-.

3. Turn the front turn signal light bulb -1- in the direction of -Arrow-
and take it out of the front turn signal light holder -2-.
Model of turn signal light bulb: PY21W
Specification of turn signal light bulb: 12V/21W

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips

 Be sure to wear gloves when replacing the bulb instead of bonding the bulb directly by hands, or otherwise you may
shorten service life of the bulb or lead to damage of the bulb.
 Check functions of the front combination light assembly after installation.

84 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5.3 Rear combination light fixed part assembly


5.3.1 Overview of rear combination light fixed part assemblies

1- Rear combination light (fixed part) 2 - Brake light bulb


 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 85  Replace the brake light bulb=> Refer to page 87
3 - Turn signal bulb 4 - Bulb holder and wire
 Replace the turn signal bulb=>Refer to Page 86  Total: 2 (one on each side)
 Total: 2 (one on each side)
5 - Screw
 Total: 4 (one on each side)

5.3.2 Removal and installation of the rear combination light fixed part assembly
Removal

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 85


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Tips

The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left rear combination light fixed part assembly, but may serve
as a reference for the right side.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.


2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of left rear combination light fixed
part assembly and remove the left rear combination light fixed part
assembly -1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2.5 - 3.5 Nm
3. Pull out harness rubber sealing cover of the left rear combination light
fixed part.

4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the left rear combination


light fixed part assembly and remove the left rear combination light fixed
part assembly -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check functions of the rear combination light fixed part assembly after installation.

5.3.3 Replacement of turn signal bulb


Removal

Tips

The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left turn signal bulb, but may serve as a reference for the right
side.
1. Remove the left rear combination light fixed part assembly=>Refer to Page 85 .

86 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Remove the left turn signal holder -1- by turning in the direction of
-Arrow-.

3. Unscrew left turn signal bulb -1- from the left turn signal indicator
holder -2- by turning in the direction of -Arrow-.
Model of turn signal bulb: PY21W
Specification of turn signal bulb: 12V/21W

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips

 Do not touch the bulb glass when installing the bulb. Your fingers will leave a mark on the bulb that makes the bulb
glass turbid.
 Check functions of the turn signal after installation.

5.3.4 Replacement of brake light bulb


Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left brake light bulb, but may serve as a reference for the right
side.

1. Remove the left rear combination light fixed part assembly=>Refer to Page 85 .

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 87


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Remove the left brake light holder -1- by turning in the direction of
-Arrow-.

3. Unscrew the left brake light bulb -1- out of the left brake light holder
-2-.
Model of brake light bulb: P21W
Specification of brake light bulb: 12V/21W

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Do not touch the bulb glass when installing the bulb. Your fingers will leave a mark on the bulb that makes the bulb
glass turbid.
 Check functions of the turn signal after installation.

88 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5.4 Rear combination light movable part assembly


5.4.1 Overview of rear combination light movable part

1 - Rear combination light movable part 2 - Reversing light bulb


Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 89 Total: 2 (one on each side)
Replace the reversing light bulb=> Refer to page 90

5.4.2 Removal and installation of the rear combination light movable part assembly
Removal

Tips

The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left rear combination light movable part assembly, but may
serve as a reference for the right side.
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 89


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Pry out cover plate -1- of the left rear combination light movable part
assembly with tools.

3. Disengage the connector of the left rear combination light movable


part assembly -Arrow- A.
4. Unscrew the fixing nut of the left rear combination light movable part
assembly -Arrow-B.
Remove the left rear combination light movable part assembly.
Nuts - Arrow B - Specifications:M6×1.0
Nut -Arrow B- tightening torque: 2.5 - 3.5 Nm
Nut -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

5.4.3 Replacement of reversing light bulb


Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left reversing light bulb, but may serve as a reference for the
right side.
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.

90 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Pry out cover plate -1- of the left rear combination light movable part
assembly with tools.

3. Remove the left reversing light holder -1- by turning in the direction
of -Arrow-.

4. Extract the left reversing light bulb -1- from the left reversing light
holder -2- in the direction of -Arrow-.
Model of reversing light bulb: W21W
Specification of reversing light bulb: 12V/21W

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips

 Do not touch the bulb glass when installing the bulb. Your fingers will leave a mark on the bulb that makes the bulb
glass turbid.
 Check functions of rear fog light after installation.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 91


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5.5 Left rear fog light assembly


5.5.1 Overview of rear fog light assembly

1 - Left rear fog light power supply 2 - Type-U exhaust pipe


Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 93
3 - Rear fog light bulb 4 - Rear fog light bulb holder
Model: P21W specification: 12V/21W
Replace the rear fog light bulb=> Refer to page 93

92 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5.5.2 Removal and installation of rear fog light assembly


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Remove lower fender of rear wheel cover => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment,
rear wheel cover fender, removal and installation of the rear wheel cover fender component.
3. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the rear fog light
assembly.

4. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the rear fog light assembly and
remove the rear fog light assembly -1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2.5 - 3.5 Nm

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

5.5.3 Rear fog light bulb replacement


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Remove lower fender of rear wheel cover => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment,
rear wheel cover fender, removal and installation of the rear wheel cover fender component.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 93


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Turn in the direction of -Arrow- and remove the rear fog light holder
-1-.

4. Turn the rear fog light bulb -1- in the direction of -Arrow- and take it
out of the rear fog light holder -2-.
Model of rear fog light bulb: P21W
Specification of rear fog light bulb: 12V/21W

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips

 Do not touch the bulb glass when installing the bulb. Your fingers will leave a mark on the bulb that makes the bulb
glass turbid.
 Check functions of rear fog light after installation.

94 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5.6 Front fog light assembly


5.6.1 Overview of front fog lights

1 - Front fog light 2 - Front fog light bulb


 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 95  Model:H11
 Specification:12V/55W
 Replacement => Refer to page 96
3 - Screw
 Total: 6 (one on each side)
 Tightening torque:2.5~3.5 Nm

5.6.2 Removal and installation of front fog light assembly


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Remove the front bumper component (applicable to right front fog light only) => Vehicle body and painting; Repair
Group: 83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of the front bumper component.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 95


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Disengage the connecting plug -Arrow- of the front fog light.

4. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the front fog light and remove
the front fog light -1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2.5 - 3.5 Nm

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

5.6.3 Front fog light bulb replacement


Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left side front fog light bulb, but may serve as a reference for
the right side.
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Remove the front bumper component (applicable to right front fog light only) => Vehicle body and painting; Repair
Group: 83; Exterior equipment; Removal and installation of the front bumper component.

96 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Disengage the connecting plug -Arrow- of the fog light from the fog
light.

4. Turn the left front fog light bulb -1- in the direction of -Arrow- and
remove the front fog light bulb -1- out of the left front fog light.
Model of fog light bulb: H11
Specification of fog light bulb: 12V/55W

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
1. Check front fog light assembly adjuster and adjust the front fog light assembly adjuster if necessary => Refer to
page 97.

5.6.4 Adjustment of the front fog light assembly


Adjustment conditions
1. The tire pressure must be standard value.
2. The vehicle shall park on a level ground.
3. The driver is seating inside the vehicle (or carrying 76kg load) and the fuel tank is filled up with fuel.
4. Start the engine.

Adjustment

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 97


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Adjust vertical irradiation direction of the front fog light assembly by


turning the adjusting bolt -Arrow- in order to adjust irradiation distance
of the front fog light.

5.7 Removal and installation of the high brake light


Removal
1. Remove spoiler component => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 88; Back door; Removal and installation
of the spoiler component.
2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the high brake light and remove
the high brake light-1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm
Specification of high brake light: 12V/3.6W
Model of high brake light: LED

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check functions of the high brake light after installation.

5.8 Removal and installation of the side turn signal lamp


Tips
Remove the side turn signal on the exterior rearview mirror => Vehicle body and painting: Repair Group: 83; Exterior
equipment; Disassembly and assembly of the exterior rearview mirror.

98 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5.9 License plate light


5.9.1 Removal and installation of license plate light assembly
Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left license plate light assembly, but may serve as a reference
for the right side.
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Pry out the left license plate light assembly -1- at the position of
-Arrow- with tools.

3. Disengage the connector of the left license plate light assembly


-Arrow- and remove the left license plate light assembly -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check functions of the left license plate light after installation.

5.9.2 License plate lamp and bulb replacement


Removal

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 99


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left license plate light bulb, but may serve as a reference for
the right side.
1. Remove the left license plate light assembly => Refer to page 99.
2. Unscrew the left license plate light holder -1- in the direction of
-Arrow-.

3. Extract the left brake light bulb -1- from its holder -2- in the direction
of -Arrow-.
Model of license plate light bulb: W5W
Specification of license plate light bulb: 12V/5W

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Do not touch the bulb glass when installing the bulb. Your fingers will leave a mark on the bulb that makes the bulb
glass turbid.
 Check functions of the left license plate light after installation.

5.10 Removal and installation of the light switch


Removal
1. Removal of the left lower trim panel of the instrument panel=>Body and painting;Repair group:82;Instrument
panel;Removal and installation of the left lower trim panel of the instrument panel

100 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Disengage the fixing clip -Arrow- and remove the light switch
assembly -1-.

3. Disengage the fixing clip -Arrow A- and remove the light luminance
adjustment switch -1-.
4. Disengage the fixing clip -Arrow B- and remove the light luminance
adjustment switch -2-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

5.11 Combination switch


5.11.1 Overview of combination switch
1. Light switch
− Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 102
2. Wiper switch
− Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 102

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 101


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5.11.2 Removal and installation of combination switch


Removal
1. Remove clock spring component => Electrical equipment; Repair Group: 72; Protection system; Removal and
installation of the clock spring component.
2. Disconnect the connecting plugs -Arrow A- and -Arrow B- of the
combination switch.

3. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the combination switch and


remove the combination switch -1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 3 - 5 Nm

Further disassemble
4. Unscrew the screw-Arrow- and remove light switch -1- and wiper
switch -2- from the combination switch bracket -3-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 0.6 - 0.8Nm

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

102 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Check functions of the combination switch after installation.

5.12 Removal and installation of hazard warning light switch


 The hazard warning light switch -1- is under the center vent.

Removal
1. Remove DA machine/AVN navigation => Refer to page 224.
2. Press the fixing clip in the direction of -Arrow- and remove the
hazard warning light switch -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check functions of the hazard warning light switch after installation.

5.13 Removal and installation of brake switch


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 103


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the brake switch, turn


counterclockwise and remove the brake switch -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.
Pay attention to correspondence of installation holes and the brake switch.

5.14 Removal and installation of clutch switch


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Remove instrument panel left lower trim panel assembly=> Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 82;
Instrument panel; Removal and installation of the instrument panel left lower trim panel assembly.
3. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the clutch switch, turn
counterclockwise and remove the clutch switch -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.
Pay attention to correspondence of installation holes and the clutch switch.
When installing the clutch switch, pull out its ejector rod and the switch would adjust its stroke automatically in the process
of pedal return.

104 Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5.15 Removal and installation of the reversing light switch


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the reversing light switch.
3. Unscrew the reversing light switch -1-.
Tightening torque of the reversing light switch -1-: 35 Nm
Reversing light switch -1-Tool: 22mm combination wrench

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

6 Headlight Adjustment
6.1 Electric height adjustment of front combination light
Adjust vertical irradiation angle of the front combination light by its height adjustment switch on the light switch in order to
adjust its irradiation distance.
Height adjustment switch -1- of the front combination light has 4
positions
1. It is only for the driver or the driver and front passengers (without
belongings).
2. Position ―1‖: 1 driver and uniform distribution load inside the trunk
3. Position ―2‖: all seats taken
4. Position ―3‖: all seats taken and uniform distribution load inside the
trunk

Repair Group 63 - Vehicle lights 105


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

64 Wiper and Washing System


1 Brief introduction
Controlled by the body control module (BCM), the wiper and washing system functions after receiving the driver's
command. All the wiping and washing functions are controlled by the wiper component assembly installed on the right side
of the steering wheel, and the system components include:
 Front and rear wiper blades
 Front and rear wiper arm
 Front and rear wiper motor and linkage mechanism
 Washing tank, front (rear) windscreen washer pump and front (rear) windscreen nozzle assembly
Divided according to vehicle model: vehicle model with rain sensor and vehicle model without rain sensor
The wiper and washing system control lever located at the right side of the steering column has five positions from top to
bottom, namely:
 Single wiper position
 OFF position
 Automatic wiper (AUTO) or INT position
 Low speed wiper position
 High speed wiper position

2 Technical parameters
Torque
Name Specification Grade Tools
Nm
Fixing bolt of front wiper motor and linkage 10mm Hexagon
M6×1.0×30 8.8 8~10
mechanism Sleeve
13mm Hexagon
Fixing nut of wiper arm assembly M8×1.25 8 18~22
Sleeve
10mm Hexagon
Fixing bolt of the rear wiper motor assembly M6×1.0×25 8.8 8~10
Sleeve
13mm Hexagon
Fixing nut of wiper arm assembly M8×1.25 8 8~12
Sleeve
10mm Hexagon
Fixing bolt of the washing tank assembly M6×1.0×20 8.8 6~8
Sleeve

3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting


Wiper not movable
No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the battery Charge the battery or
Proceed to Step 1. Undervoltage
voltage is normal? replace the battery
Check the fixing nut of the
1 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
wiper arm
Check whether the fixing Wiper blade does not
Tighten nut with the
nut of the wiper arm is Proceed to Step 2. move or rotates at a
specified torque
loose certain speed
2 Check wiper system fuse Normal There's a fault Operation methods

106 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

No. Inspection steps Check results


Check whether the wiper
Proceed to Step 3. Fuse blown Replace the fuse
system fuse is blown
3 Check wiper system relay Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the wiper Wiper system relay not
Proceed to Step 4. Replace the relay.
system relay is working working
Check the wiper motor
4 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
rocker arm
Check whether the rocker
Rocker arm nut on the Tighten nut with the
arm nut on the wiper motor Proceed to Step 5.
wiper motor loose specified torque
is loose
5 Check the motor Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Wiper blade does not
Check whether the wiper Replace the wiper
Proceed to Step 6. move or rotates at a
motor is damaged motor
certain speed
Check the wiper
6 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
component
Check whether the wiper Wiper component Replace the wiper
Proceed to Step 7.
component is damaged damaged component
7 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.
Washing system not working
No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the battery Charge the battery or
Proceed to Step 1. Undervoltage
voltage is normal? replace the battery
1 Check the fuse Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the
Washing system fuse
washing system fuse is Proceed to Step 2. Replace the fuse
blown
blown
Check the washing system
2 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
relay
Check whether the
Washing system relay
washing system relay is Proceed to Step 3. Replace the relay.
not working
working
Check the wiper
3 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
component
Check whether the wiper Wiper component Replace the wiper
Proceed to Step 4.
component is damaged damaged component
4 Check the washer pump Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the washer Replace the washer
Proceed to Step 5. Washer pump damaged
pump is damaged pump
5 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 107


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code


4.1 DTC fault code list
Fault Code Definition
B110412 Front wiper enable output short to power supply
B110414 Front wiper enable output short to ground or open
B110512 Front wiper speed output short to power supply
B110514 Front wiper speed output short to ground or open
B110612 Rear defrost output short to power supply
B110614 Rear defrost output short to ground or open
B110E1E Wiper pause switch short to ground
B112512 Rear washer output short to power supply
B112514 Rear washer output short to ground or open
B112612 Rear wiper output short to power supply
B112614 Rear wiper output short to ground or open
B112A11 Front washer switch stuck
B112B11 Rear washer switch stuck
B114011 Rear defrost switch stuck
B11EC04 RLS RS fault
B11ED04 RLS LS fault
B11EE04 RLS installation fault
U12E487 RLS response fault

4.2 B110412 Front Wiper Enable Output Short to Power Supply B110414 Front Wiper Enable
Output Short to Ground or Open
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, front
Front wiper enable
wiper enable relay is short  Wire fault
B110412 output short to power —
to power supply for 200ms  Control unit fault
supply
when the output is valid.
 With the ignition ON, front
Front wiper enable wiper enable relay is short
 Wire fault
B110414 output short to ground — to ground or open for
 Control unit fault
or open 200ms when the output is
invalid.

108 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps:
1. Check whether fuse FB34 (15A) of the front compartment electrical box is blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check front wiper high speed relay J30 and front wiper low speed relay J29 for crack and abnormality and check the
terminals for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No-Replace the front wiper high speed relay J30 and front wiper low speed relay J29 and clean the terminal.
3. Check whether front wiper high speed relay J30 and front wiper low speed relay J29 are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No-Replace the front wiper high speed relay J30 and front wiper low speed relay J29.
Conditions Multimeter connecting pins Rated value
Constant state Normal 30-87A conductive Connectivity
Constant state Common status 85-86 Connectivity
Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply
30-87 Connectivity
supply voltage

4. Disconnect front wiper motor connector T6f and check whether wires
between pins T18b/3 and T18b/10 of the front compartment electrical
box connector and pins T6f/4 and T6f/5 of the front wiper motor
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 109


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether pins T6f/4 and
T6f/5 of the front wiper motor connector are short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether pins T6f/4 and T6f/5 of the front wiper motor
connector are short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

7. Check whether power supply and grounding of the body controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
8. Replace the front wiper motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 9.
− No-Replace the front wiper motor.
9. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

110 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.3 B110512 Front Wiper Speed Output Short to Power Supply B110514 Front Wiper Speed
Output Short to Ground or Open
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, front
Front wiper speed wiper high speed relay is
 Wire fault
B110512 output short to power short to power supply for
 Control unit fault
supply 200ms when the output is
valid.
 With the ignition ON, front
Front wiper speed wiper high speed relay is
 Wire fault
B110514 output short to ground short to ground or open for
 Control unit fault
or open 200ms when the output is
invalid.

Diagnostic steps:
1. Check whether fuse FB34 (15A) of the front compartment electrical box is blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check front wiper high speed relay J30 and front wiper low speed relay J29 for crack and abnormality and check the
terminals for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No-Replace the front wiper high and low speed relay J126 and clean the terminal.
3. Check whether front wiper high speed relay J30 and front wiper low
speed relay J29 are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No-Replace the front wiper high speed relay J30 and front wiper
low speed relay J29.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 111


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Conditions Multimeter connecting pins Rated value


Constant state Common status 30-87A Connectivity
Constant state Common status 85-86 Connectivity
Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply
30-87 Connectivity
supply voltage

4. Disconnect front compartment electrical box connector T16d and


check whether wire between pin T16d/14 of the front compartment
electrical box connector and pin T40a/3 of the body controller connector
is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T16d/14
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

112 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the pin T16d/14 of the front compartment electrical


box connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

7. Disconnect front compartment electrical box connector T20d and


check whether the wire between pin T20d/2 of the front compartment
electrical box connector and pin T40a/6 of the body controller
connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 113


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T20d/2
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 9.

9. Disconnect battery negative cable and check whether the pin T20d/2
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body
grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 10.

10. Check whether power supply and grounding of the body controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

114 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.4 B110612 Rear Defrost Output Short to Power Supply B110614 Defrost Output Short to
Ground or Open B114011 Rear Defrost Switch Stuck
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, rear
Rear defrost output defrost relay is short to  Wire fault
B110612 —
short to power supply power supply for 200ms  Control unit fault
when the output is valid.
 With the ignition ON, rear
Rear defrost output defrost relay is short to  Wire fault
B110614 —
short to ground or open ground or open for 200ms  Control unit fault
when the output is invalid.
 With the ignition ON, rear
Rear defrost switch  Wire fault
B114011 — window defrost switch is
stuck  Control unit fault
valid for 15s.
1. Check whether the fuses RF42 (30A), RF43 (30A) and RF24 (7.5A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check the rear defrost relay J114 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No-Replace the rear defrost relay J114 and clean the terminal.

3. Check whether the rear defrost relay J114 is normal.


− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No-Replace the rear defrost relay J114

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 115


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Conditions Multimeter connecting pins Rated value


Constant state Common status 85-86 Connectivity
Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply
30-87 Connectivity
supply voltage

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40 and check whether the


wire between pin T22b/12 of the front compartment electrical box
connector and pin T40a/23 of the body controller connector is
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T22b/12
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

116 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the pin T22b/12 of the front compartment electrical


box connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

7. Disconnect positive terminal 1p of rear windscreen defrost heating


wire and check whether the wire between pin T18d/17 of the front
compartment electrical box connector and pin T1p/1 at positive terminal
of the rear windscreen defrost heating wire is conductive.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 8.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 117


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T18d/17
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 9.

9. Disconnect battery negative cable and check whether the pin T18d/17
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the body
grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 10.

10. Replace (repair) rear windscreen defrost heating wire, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No-Replace (repair) rear windscreen defrost heating wire.
11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

118 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.5 B110E1E Wiper Pause Switch Short to Ground B112A11 Front Washer Switch Stuck
B112B11 Rear Washer Switch Stuck
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON,
Wiper pause switch  Wire fault
B110E1E — wiper pause switch is short
short to ground  Control unit fault
to ground for 400ms
 With the ignition ON, front
Front washer switch  Wire fault
B112A11 — washer switch is valid for
stuck  Control unit fault
15s.
 With the ignition ON, rear
Rear washer switch  Wire fault
B112B11 — washer switch is valid for
stuck  Control unit fault
15s.

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect wiper combination switch connector T10m, check wiper combination switch connector T10m for crack and
abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller


connector T40a and check whether wires between pins T0m/1, T0m/2
and T0m/5 of the wiper combination switch connector and pins
T40a/36, T40a/15 and T40a/35 of the body controller connector are
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 119


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Check whether pins T0m/1, T0m/2, T0m/5, T10n/7, T10n/8 and


T10n/10 of the wiper combination switch connector are short to the body
grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

4. Replace the wiper combination switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 6.
− No-Replace the wiper combination switch.
5. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

4.6 B11EC04 RLS_RS Fault B11ED04 RLS_LS Fault B11EE04 RLS Installation Fault U12E487
RLS Response Fault
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 LIN slave wire error
B11EC04 RLS_RS fault —  ―RLS_RSErr‖ value is 1  Wire fault
 Control unit fault
 LIN slave wire error
B11ED04 RLS_LS fault —  ―RLS_LSErr‖ value is 1
 Control unit fault
 With the ignition ON,
configure data  LIN slave wire error
B11EE04 RLS installation fault —
RLS Windshield=0 or RLS  Control unit fault
node internal fault

120 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 LIN slave wire error
U12E487 RLS response fault —  ―RLS_RespErr‖ value is 1
 Control unit fault
Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect rain sensor connector T4b, check rain sensor connector T4b for crack and abnormality and check the pins for
corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check whether fuse FB41 (5A) in the instrument panel electrical box is blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 3.

3. With the ignition under ON status, check whether the voltage between
pin T4b/1 of the rain sensor connector and the body grounding is the
battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 121


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and check whether the


wire between pin T4b/2 of the rain sensor connector and pin T40a/16 of
the body controller connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T4b/2
of the rain sensor connector is short to the positive terminal of the
battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

122 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the pin T4b/2 of the rain sensor connector is short to
the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 8.

7. Check whether pin T4b/3 of the rain sensor connector and the body
grounding is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 9.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Replace the rain sensor and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and
its symptoms remain.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 10.
− No-Replace the rain sensor.
9. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 123


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.7 B112512 Rear Washer Output Short to Power Supply B112514 Rear Washer Output Short to
Ground or Open
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, rear
 Actuator error
Rear washer output washing relay is short to
B112512 —  Wire fault
short to power supply power supply for 200ms
 Control unit fault
when the output is valid.
 With the ignition ON, rear
 Actuator error
Rear washer output washing relay is short to
B112514 —  Wire fault
short to ground or open ground or open for 200ms
 Control unit fault
when the output is invalid.
Diagnostic steps:
1. Check whether fuse FB35 (15A) of the front compartment electrical box is blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check the rear washing relay J112 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No-Replace the rear washing relay J112 and clean the terminal.

3. Check whether the rear washing relay J112 is normal.


− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No Replace the rear washing relay J112.

Conditions Multimeter connecting pins Rated value


Constant state Common status 85-86 Connectivity

124 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Conditions Multimeter connecting pins Rated value


Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply
30-87 Connectivity
supply voltage

4. Disconnect front compartment electrical box connector T20d and


check whether the wire between pin T20d/10 of the front compartment
electrical box connector and pin T40a/12 of the body controller
connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T20d/10
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 125


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the pin T20d/10 of the front compartment electrical


box connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

7. Check whether power supply and grounding of the body controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
8. Replace the front wiper motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes Proceed to Step 9.
− No-Replace the front wiper motor.
9. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

4.8 B112612 Rear Wiper Output Short to Power Supply B112614 Rear Wiper Output Short to
Ground or Open
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, rear
 LIN slave wire error
Rear wiper output short wiper relay is short to
B112612 —  Wire fault
to power supply power supply for 200ms
 Control unit fault
when the output is valid.
 With the ignition ON, rear
Rear wiper output short wiper relay is short to  LIN slave wire error
B112614 —
to ground or open ground or open for 200ms  Control unit fault
when the output is invalid.

126 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps:
1. Check whether fuse FB35 (15A) of the front compartment electrical box is blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check the rear wiper relay J111 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No-Replace the rear wiper relay J111 and clean the terminal.

3. Check whether rear wiper relay J111 is normal.


− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No-Replace the rear wiper relay J111.

Conditions Multimeter connecting pins Rated value


Constant state Common status 85-86 Connectivity
Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply
30-87 Connectivity
supply voltage

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 127


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. Disconnect front compartment electrical box connector T22b and


check whether the wire between pin T22b/19 of the front compartment
electrical box connector and pin T40a/33 of the body controller
connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T22b/19
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

128 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the pin T22b/19 of the front compartment electrical


box connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

7. Disconnect rear wiper motor connector T3p and check whether the
wire between pin T3p/3 of the rear wiper motor connector and pin
T18d/18 of the front compartment electrical box connector is
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 129


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T3p/3 of
the rear wiper motor connector is short to the positive terminal of the
battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 9.

9. Check whether the pin T3p/3 of the rear wiper motor connector is
short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 10.

10. Check whether power supply and grounding of the body controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
11. Replace the front wiper motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No-Replace the front wiper motor.
12. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

130 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5 Front Wiper
5.1 Overview of front wiper

1 - Front wiper motor and connecting rod assembly 2 - Fixing bolt of front wiper motor and connecting rod
mechanism
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 135  Total: 3
 Specification:M6×1.0×30
 Tightening torque:8~10 Nm
3 - Fixing nut cap of the front wiper arm assembly 4 - Fixing nut of wiper arm assembly
 Total: 2  Total: 2
 Check, replace if necessary  Specification:M8×1.25
 Tightening torque:18~22 Nm
5 - Front passenger side wiper arm 6 - Front passenger side wiper blade
 Check, replace if necessary  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 132
7 - Turn over the driver side wiper arm. 8 - Driver side wiper blade
 Check, replace if necessary  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 132

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 131


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5.2 Removal and installation of the front wiper blade


5.2.1 Removal and installation of the boneless front wiper blade
Removal

Tips

 Do not mix driver side wiper blade with that at the front passenger side in assembly.
 The instruction is only for removal and installation of the driver side wiper blade, but may serve as a reference for
removal and installation of the front passenger side wiper blade.

1. Turn over the driver side wiper arm.


2. Press the unlocking device -Arrow- and remove the driver side wiper
blade -1-.

Tips
Proceed with caution to prevent damaging the front windscreen.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
1. Push fixture of the front wiper blade to stop position of the wiper arm.
2. Turn the front wiper arm back onto the front windscreen carefully.
3. Operate the front wiper arm to reset position => Refer to page 136.

5.2.2 Removal and installation of the boned front wiper blade


Removal

Tips

 Do not mix driver side wiper blade with that at the front passenger side in assembly.
 The instruction is only for removal and installation of the driver side wiper blade, but may serve as a reference for
removal and installation of the front passenger side wiper blade.
 Proceed with caution to prevent damaging the front windscreen.

132 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1. Turn over the driver side wiper arm.


2 Turn the front wiper blade -1- along the direction of -Arrow- to be
vertical to the wiper arm.

3. Hold the front wiper blade -1- and disengage and remove the front
wiper blade from the wiper arm.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
1. Push fixture of the front wiper blade to stop position of the wiper arm.

Tips
There is lock sound when the fixture is pushed to the stop position.

2. Turn the front wiper arm back onto the front windscreen carefully.
3. Operate the front wiper arm to reset position => General; Repair Group: 01; General information; Check and
replace and maintain if necessary; Position of the window glass wiper blade; Check and adjustment.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 133


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5.3 Removal and installation of front wiper arm assembly


Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

T61276401-Wiper arm puller

Removal
Tips
The instruction is only for removal and installation of the driver side wiper arm assembly, but may serve as a reference for
removal and installation of the front passenger side wiper arm assembly.
1. Pry down the fixing nut cap -Arrow- of the driver side wiper arm
assembly.

2. Unscrew fixing nut -Arrow- of the driver side wiper arm assembly
-1-.
Nut - Arrow- specification:M8×1.25
Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 18 - 22 Nm
Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 13mm hexagon sleeve

134 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Extract the wiper arm assembly -1- using the wiper arm puller
-T61276401-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
1. Run the front wiper motor to its final position. With the ignition ON, open wiper component switch and switch off the
ignition when the front wiper motor stops.
Switch
2. Install the front wiper arm assembly in the final position of the wiper shaft, and tighten the fixing nuts with hands.
3. Adjust reset position of the wiper blade after installation => Refer to page 136.
4. Tighten the fixing nut according to the specified torque.

5.4 Removal and installation of front wiper motor and linkage assembly
Removal
1. Operate the wiper to reset position.
2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
3. Remove the ventilation trim panel component=> Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment;
Removal and installation of the ventilation trim panel component.

4. Disengage the connecting plug -Arrow A- of the front wiper motor


from its fixing support and disconnect connection between the
connecting plug of the front wiper motor and the harness.
5. Unscrew the fixing bolt component -Arrow B- of front wiper motor
and linkage assembly and remove front wiper motor and linkage
assembly -1-.
Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications:M6×1.0×30
Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque:8±10 Nm
Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 135


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Tips
If front wiper motor and linkage assembly deviate from the reset position in the course of operation, connect the plug before
installation and operate slowly to reset.

5.5 Adjust reset position of the wiper blade


1. Run the wiper into the reset position and turn off the ignition switch.
2. Adjust reset position of the front windscreen wiper blade.
Driver side:

Whether tip of the front wiper blade is at the locating point -Arrow-.

Tips
If necessary, adjust the installation position of the front wiper arm by unscrewing its mounting nut in order to adjust reset
position of the front windscreen wiper blade.
Front passenger side:
Whether tip of the front wiper blade is at the locating point -Arrow-.

Tips
If necessary, adjust the installation position of the front wiper arm by unscrewing its mounting nut in order to adjust reset
position of the front windscreen wiper blade.

136 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6 Rear Wiper
6.1 Overview of rear wiper

1 - Rear wiper blade 2 - Fixing bolt component of the rear wiper motor assembly
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 138  Total: 3
 Specification:M6×1.0×25
 Tightening torque:8~10 Nm
3 - Rear wiper arm 4 - Fixing nut of rear wiper arm assembly
 Check, replace if necessary  Total: 1
 Specification:M8×1.25
 Tightening torque:8~12 Nm
5 - Fixing nut cap of rear wiper arm assembly 6 - Rear wiper motor assembly
 Check, replace if necessary  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 139

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 137


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6.2 Removal and installation of rear wiper blade


Removal
1. Turn over the rear wiper arm assembly.
2. Turn the rear wiper blade backward to the extremity position, press
the locking clip and remove the rear wiper blade -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
1. Push fixture of the rear wiper blade to stop position of the wiper arm.
2. Turn the rear wiper arm onto the rear windscreen carefully.
3. Operate the rear wiper arm to reset position => Refer to page 140.

6.3 Removal and installation of rear wiper arm assembly


Removal
1. Open fixing nut cap -1- of the rear wiper arm assembly.
2. Unscrew fixing nut -Arrow- of the rear wiper arm assembly -2-.
Nut - Arrow- specification:M8×1.25
Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 8 - 12 Nm
Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 13mm hexagon sleeve

138 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Remove the rear wiper arm assembly -1- with tools.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
1. Operate the rear wiper motor to reset position With the ignition ON, open wiper component switch and switch off the
ignition when the rear wiper motor stops.
Switch
2. Install the rear wiper arm assembly in the final position of the wiper shaft, and tighten the fixing nuts with hands.
3. Adjust reset position of the rear wiper blade after installation => Refer to page 140.
4. Tighten the fixing nut according to the specified torque.

6.4 Removal and installation of the rear wiper motor assembly


Removal
1. Operate the wiper to reset position.
2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
3. Remove the rear wiper arm assembly=>Refer to Page 138 .
4. Remove back door lower trim panel assembly => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 88; Back door;
Removal and installation of the back door lower trim panel assembly.
5. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow A- of the rear wiper motor
assembly.
6. Unscrew the fixing bolt component -Arrow B- of the rear wiper motor
assembly and remove the rear wiper motor assembly -1-.
Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications:M6×1.0×25
Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque:8±10 Nm
Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 139


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Tips
If rear wiper motor and linkage assembly deviate from the reset position in the course of operation, connect the plug before
installation and operate slowly to reset.

6.5 Adjust reset position of the wiper blade


1. Run the wiper into the reset position and turn off the ignition switch.
2. Adjust reset position of the rear windscreen wiper blade.
Keep the rear wiper arm assembly -1- facing the left side and regulate
the rear wiper blade to be parallel to the second resistance wire (-Arrow-
area).

Tips
If necessary, adjust the installation position of the wiper arm by unscrewing its mounting nut in order to adjust reset
position of the rear windscreen wiper blade.

140 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7 Washers System
7.1 Overview of front windscreen washing system

1 - Front windscreen nozzle assembly 2 - Washing tank filler


 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 145
3 - Washing tank assembly 4 - Front windshield washing pump
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 145  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 143
5 - Washing hose I 6 - Washing hose II
 Check, replace if necessary  Check, replace if necessary
7 - Fixing bolt of the washing tank assembly
 Total: 4
 Specification:M6×1.0×20
 Tightening torque:6~8Nm

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 141


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7.2 Overview of rear windscreen washing system

1 - Rear windscreen nozzle assembly 2 - Washing hose II


 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 146  Check, replace if necessary
3 - Washing hose I 4 - Rear windscreen washer pump
 Check, replace if necessary  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 143
5 - Washing tank assembly 6 - Washing tank filler
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 145
7 - Fixing bolt of the washing tank assembly
 Total: 3
 Specification:M6×1.0×20
 Tightening torque:6~8 Nm

142 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7.3 Removal and installation of washer pump


7.3.1 Removal and installation of the front windscreen washer pump
Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Remove right front wheel cover fender => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment: Front
wheel cover fender; Removal and installation of the front wheel cover fender.
3. Remove the retaining buckle -Arrow A- of the front bumper lower
protective panel, unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow B- and remove the
front bumper lower protective panel -1-.
Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications:M6×1.0×16
Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 8 - 12 Nm
Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the front windscreen


washer pump-1-.
5. Disengage connecting hose -2- of the front windscreen washer
pump-1-.

Tips
Collect split cleaning fluid with a proper container when disengaging
the washer pump hose.
6. Extract the front windscreen washer pump and sealing ring
component -1- from the washing tank assembly.

Tips
Replace the sealing ring in every time removal.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
Pay attention to correct installation of the sealing ring when installing the front windscreen washer pump.
Fill the glass cleaning fluid to the standard level (around 3.0L).

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 143


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7.3.2 Removal and installation of the rear windscreen washer pump


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Remove right front wheel cover fender => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment: Front
wheel cover fender; Removal and installation of the front wheel cover fender.
3. Remove the retaining buckle -Arrow A- of the front bumper lower
protective panel, unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow B- and remove the
front bumper lower protective panel -1-.
Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications:M6×1.0×16
Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 8 - 12 Nm
Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Tips
12 screws -Arrow A and 9 clips -Arrow B.

4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the rear windscreen


washer pump-2-.
5. Disengage connecting hose -1- of the rear windscreen washer pump
-2-.

Tips
Collect split cleaning fluid with a proper container when disengaging
the washer pump hose.

6. Extract rear windscreen washer pump -2- and sealing ring component
out of the washing tank assembly.
Tips
Replace the sealing ring in every time removal.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
Pay attention to correct installation of the sealing ring when installing the rear windscreen washer pump.
Fill the glass cleaning fluid to the standard level (around 3.0L).

144 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7.4 Removal and installation of washing tank assembly


Removal
1. Remove the front bumper component=>Vehicle Body and Painting; Repair Group:83; Exterior equipment; Removal
and installation of front bumper component.
2. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow- of the washing tank assembly filler.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M6×1.0×20
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 8 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

3. Disengage the connector of the front windscreen washer pump


-Arrow-A.
the connector of the rear windscreen washer pump -Arrow-B.
4. Disengage washing pipelines -2- and -4- from the washing tank
assembly.

Tips
Collect split cleaning fluid with a proper container when disengaging
the washer pump hose.

5. Remove the front windscreen washer pump-1- and the rear


windscreen washer pump-3-.
6. Unscrew the fixing bolt of the washing tank assembly-Arrow-C and
remove the washing tank assembly.
螺栓-箭头 C-规格:M6×1.0×20
Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque: 6 - 8 Nm
Bolt -Arrow C- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
Fill the glass cleaning fluid to the standard level.

7.5 Removal and installation of the front windscreen nozzle assembly


Removal

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 145


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Tips
The instruction is only for removal and installation of the left front windscreen nozzle assembly, but may serve as a reference
for removal and installation of the right front windscreen nozzle assembly.

1. Remove the ventilation trim panel component=> Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment;
Removal and installation of the ventilation trim panel component.
2. Disengage the washing hose -1- from the front windscreen nozzle -2-.
3. Press the fixing clip -Arrow- of the front windscreen nozzle and
remove the front windscreen nozzle -2-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

7.6 Removal and installation of the rear windscreen nozzle assembly


Removal
1. Remove spoiler component => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 88; Back door; Removal and installation
of the spoiler component.
2. Press the fixing clip -Arrow- of the rear windscreen nozzle and
remove the rear windscreen nozzle -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

8 Washing Unit: Check


Front windscreen washing device

146 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Spray: check
1. The spraying position is in the middle of front windshield 1/3
arrow-A-.

Tips
 If the nozzle -Arrow- is blocked, stretch a needle or a fine wire into
the hole to remove the obstacle.
 Stretch a needle or a fine wire into the nozzle -Arrow B- to adjust
the direction of spraying if necessary.

Rear windscreen washing device


Spray: check
1. The spraying position of the rear washing device is at the left of the
top scraping area on the rear windscreen, where the washer fluid may
flow to.

Tips
 If the nozzle -Arrow- is blocked, stretch a needle or a fine wire into
the hole to remove the obstacle.
 Stretch a needle or a fine wire into the nozzle -Arrow- to adjust
the direction of spraying if necessary.

9 Removal and installation of the rain/light sensor


Removal
1. Remove anti-dazzling interior rearview mirror => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment;
Removal and installation of the anti-dazzling interior rearview mirror.
2. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow-of the rain/light sensor.

Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system 147


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Turn locking ring -2- of the rain/light sensor -1- counterclockwise


along the direction of -Arrow-
4. Remove the rain/light sensor -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Remove the transparent protective film before installing onto the bracket and do not touch flexible silica gel of the
sensor.
 Make sure the ignition is OFF and glass in the installation area is dry (water-free) and without dirt such as greasy dirt
and fingerprint.
 When the ignition is switched on, the sensor is first initialized and completes installation and fitting with the glass
automatically.

148 Repair Group 64 - Wiper and washing system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

66 Heating and Cooling System


1 Rear windscreen defrost system
1.1 Brief introduction
The rear windscreen defrost system is a heating system for the time
when the rear windscreen has fog, frost or moisture that heats the rear
windscreen by the heating wire -1- at its bottom to clear fog, frost or
moisture on the rear windscreen and bring a clear vision.

Tips
Be careful when cleaning the glass or removing dirt, stickers or
adhesives from the glass. Sharp tools may damage or scrape the heating
wire. It is recommended to use a cleaning cloth or towel dipped in glass
cleaner or hot water to clean the glass.

1.2 How it works


With the ignition ON (after engine start), open rear windscreen defrost
switch -Arrow- on the air-conditioning control panel, so the battery will
supply power to the rearview mirror glass (if any)/the rear windscreen
heating wire that will heat the rearview mirror glass (if any)/the rear
windscreen to help to remove frost or mist on the surface of the rearview
mirror glass (if any)/the rear windscreen.

Note

After initial operation for about 15 minutes, the heating system will
shut down automatically. In the 15 minutes after the heating system is
turned on, press the rear windscreen defrost switch again to turn off
the heating system.

1.3 Inspection of rear windscreen defrost heating wire


1. With the ignition ON (after engine start), open rear windscreen
defrost switch on the air-conditioning control panel and touch the rear
windscreen or the rearview mirror to check the working condition of the
heating system. After 4 minutes, obvious temperature difference may be
detected on the glass and the rearview mirror close to terminals -1- and
-2- of the rear windscreen heating wire.
2. If no temperature difference is detected, use a 12V voltmeter to
measure the voltage between terminals -1- and -2- of the rear
windscreen heating wire, which should be the battery voltage. If the
voltage of battery cannot be read from the voltmeter, please carry out
the following inspections:
a. Confirm that the ignition is ON.

Repair Group 66 - Heating and cooling system 149


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

b. Check the conductivity between the negative terminal and the body grounding.
c. Check the heating relays and fuses in the vehicle fuse box.

1.4 Removal and installation of rear windscreen defrost relay


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Remove fuse cover plate -1- on the instrument panel.

3. Disconnect the rear windscreen defrost relay -Arrow-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

150 Repair Group 66 - Heating and cooling system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1.5 Removal and installation of rear windscreen defrost switch


As the rear windscreen defrost switch -Arrow- is integrated in the air
conditioning control panel, it cannot be repaired separately. The entire
air-conditioning control panel must be replaced if faulty or damaged.

2 Rearview mirror heating (if any)


2.1 Brief introduction
The rearview mirror heating is working together with the rear windscreen defrost system.
The rearview mirror heating can promptly remove the fog frost, and moisture on the rearview mirror, thus providing a clear
vision and improving road safety.

2.2 How it works


With the ignition ON (after start-up of engine), press the rear
windscreen defrost switch on the air conditioning controller -Arrow-, so
the battery will supply power to the rearview mirror/rear windscreen
heating wire, which will heat the rearview mirror/rear windscreen, to
help remove frost or mist on the glass surface.

Note

After initial operation for about 15 minutes, the heating system will
shut down automatically. In the 15 minutes after the heating system is
turned on, press the rear windscreen defrost switch again to turn off
the heating system.
The heating wire behind the exterior rearview mirror glass is irreparable, which if failed or damaged, the rearview mirror
lens must be replaced.

2.3 Removal and installation of the rearview mirror heating wire


Removal

Tips
The rearview mirror heating wire is integrated with the lens that must be removed and installed together with the lens.

Repair Group 66 - Heating and cooling system 151


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.


2. Pry out exterior rearview mirror lens -1- at the position of -Arrow-
with tools.

Tips
Pay attention to the force exerted for fear of damage to the exterior
rearview mirror lens -1-.

3. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the exterior rearview


mirror lens wire and remove the exterior rearview mirror lens -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

152 Repair Group 66 - Heating and cooling system


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

67 Parking Distance Control System


1 Reversing Radar System
1.1 System overview
Reversing radar system
The reversing radar with use of ultrasonic testing technique reminds whether there is any obstacle and the distance of the
obstacle behind the vehicle in reversing by sound and image manner so as to assist the driver to park safely and avoid crash.

Characteristics of reversing radar system:


 The single-transmitting & multi-receiving sensor features accurate detection, compact structure and sensitive sensing
and is resistant to water, dust and shock.
 The control module applied with microprocessor (MCU) control technology and optimized circuit design has stable
performance and endurance.
 The audible alarm lets the driver know approximate distance and orientation of the obstacle behind the vehicle and
thus facilitates parking.
 Powered-on self-test (POST) function.

1.2 Technical parameters


Torque
Name Specification Grade Tools
Nm
8mm Hexagon
The fixing bolt of the reversing radar control unit M6×1.0×15 8.8 5~7
Sleeve

1.3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting


1.3.1 The entire reversing radar system not working
No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the fuse is
Proceed to Step 1. Fuse blown Replace the fuse
blown
Check the automatic
1 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
transmission control unit
Check whether the Replace the automatic
Automatic transmission
automatic transmission Proceed to Step 2. transmission control
control unit damaged
control unit is normal unit
Check the circuit of the
2 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
reversing radar control unit
Check whether the power
The reversing radar
supply for the circuit of the Repair or replace the
Proceed to Step 3. control unit short or
reversing radar control unit harness
open
is normal
Check the reversing radar
3 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
control unit

Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System 153


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

No. Inspection steps Check results


Check whether the
Reversing radar control Replace the reversing
reversing radar control unit Proceed to Step 4.
unit damaged radar control unit
damaged
Check the vehicle body
4 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
controller
Check the vehicle body Whether the body Replace the vehicle
Proceed to Step 5.
controller for damages controller is damaged body controller
5 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

1.3.2 Reverse gear engaged, buzzer sounding constantly


No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether there are
Foreign objects (e.g.
foreign objects(e.g. sludge
sludge, water, etc.) on Remove the foreign
and water, etc.) on the Proceed to Step 1.
the surface of the objects
surface of the reversing
reversing radar probe
radar probe
Check the reversing radar
1 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
control unit
Check whether the
Reversing radar control Replace the reversing
reversing radar control unit Proceed to Step 2.
unit damaged radar control unit
damaged
Check the vehicle body
2 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
controller
Check the vehicle body Whether the body Replace the vehicle
Proceed to Step 3.
controller for damages controller is damaged body controller
3 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

1.3.3 The radar is not working when the reverse gear is engaged
No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether power
The reversing radar
supply for the circuit of the Repair or replace the
Proceed to Step 1. control unit short or
reversing radar control unit harness
open
is normal
Check the reversing radar
1 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
probe
Check whether the
Reversing radar probe Replace the reversing
reversing radar probe is Proceed to Step 2.
damaged radar probe
normal
Check the reversing radar
2 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
control unit

154 Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

No. Inspection steps Check results


Check whether the
Reversing radar control Replace the reversing
reversing radar control unit Proceed to Step 3.
unit damaged radar control unit
damaged
3 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

1.4 Overview of reversing radar

1 - Replace the reversing radar probe 2 - Sealing ring of the reversing radar probe
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 157  Check, replace if necessary
3 - Reversing radar probe bracket 4 - Replace the reversing radar control unit
 Check, replace if necessary  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 156
5 - The fixing bolt of the reversing radar control unit
 Total: 2
 Specification:M6×1.0×15
 Tightening torque:5~7 Nm

Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System 155


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1.5 Removal and installation of the reversing radar control unit.


Removal

Tips
The reversing radar control unit is located behind the right rear wheel cover trim panel assembly.
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Remove wheel cover trim panel assembly => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment:
Trim part and trim panel: Removal and installation of the wheel cover trim panel assembly.
3. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow- of the reversing radar control unit
and remove the reversing radar control unit -1-.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M6×1.0×15
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 5 - 7 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve

4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the reversing radar control


unit and remove the reversing radar control unit -1-.

156 Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
Check alarm functions of the reversing radar after installation.

1.6 Reversing radar probe


1.6.1 Removal and installation of reversing radar probe
Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for removal and installation of the left reversing radar probe, but may serve as a reference for
removal and installation of the right reversing radar probe.
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Disengage the lock piece -Arrow A- of the reversing radar probe
bracket and remove the left front reversing radar probe -1-.
3. Disengage the the connecting plug -Arrow B- of the left reversing
radar probe and remove the left reversing radar probe-1-.

Note

If excessive force is applied to the probe, it may generate fine cracks


and cause malfunction.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips

 Pay attention to installation position of the reversing radar probe.


 When installing the reversing radar probe -1-, make sure the two
locking lugs -Arrow A- of the reversing radar probe are clamped
into the locking slot -Arrow B- of the reversing radar probe bracket
-2-.
 The annular gap between the head of the reversing radar probe
and the bumper component must be even.

Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System 157


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1.6.2 Inspection of reversing radar probe


The reversing radar probe must be kept clean. If dirt and dust are stuck to the surface of sensor, rinse it with low pressure
waterspout. Do not clean the surface of the reversing radar probe with sandpaper, screwdriver or other sharp tools; otherwise,
it may affect the detection accuracy or cause permanent damage.

Tips
In case of any accumulation on the surface of the reversing radar probe, do not rinse the probe directly with high pressure
water gun at a short distance when washing the vehicle.

Note

The following conditions may affect the performance of the sensor detecting obstacles, pay attention during inspection.

 The front/rear bumper panel or the reversing radar probe get strong impact.
 The surface of reversing radar probe is covered with a layer of moisture, water, dirt, snow or ice.
 The reversing radar probe is frozen.
 The vehicle inclines obviously when reversing.
 The vehicle is reversing on particularly bumpy road, slope, macadam or grass.
 Under burning sun or in cold weather.
 The surrounding of the vehicle is quite noisy.For example, there are cars horning, motorcycle engine sound, brake
sound of a large vehicle or other strong noise with ultrasonic wave.
 Reverse speed is too high.

158 Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2 Rearview Camera System


2.1 System overview
General descriptions
The rearview camera system is a camera installed on the back door of the vehicle that shots image of the vehicle behind and
transmits to the on-board display to be displayed there to assist the driver in parking. When reversing the vehicle and
parking at a narrow stall, the driver may see the vehicle rear image clearly on the display transmitted by the rear camera. In
this way, the system assists the driver to park safely and easily and avoids crash and scratch of the vehicle body.
The rearview camera system has following characteristics:
 In the rearview camera system, the camera device installed at the back of the vehicle clearly indicates the obstacle
behind the vehicle through the on-board screen.
 The on-board display applies TFT true color after anti-magnetic treatment that is free from signal interference and
strobe flash.
Normal functions of the rearview camera system
 The rearview camera would disappear when the reversing speed is over 15km/h and restores displaying when the
vehicle speed reduces from 15km/h to 12km/h.
 The rearview camera system stops completely when the reverse gear is quit.
 In normal working: the camera shots the image within the imaging area behind the vehicle that is then displayed on the
display.

2.2 Fault symptoms and troubleshooting


2.2.1 Rearview camera display not working
No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the power
supply for the rearview
camera display is normal; Power supply for the
Repair the power
Check whether the Proceed to Step 1. rearview camera
supply circuit
connection between the display short or open
harness and the connector
is normal.
Check whether the
1 reversing switch works Normal There's a fault Operation methods
normally
Check whether the Inside of rearview
Replace the rearview
rearview camera display is Proceed to Step 2. camera display breaks
camera display
damaged down or pins corrosive
Reversing switch or
2 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
gearshift switch
Check whether the Replace the automatic
Automatic transmission
automatic transmission Proceed to Step 3. transmission control
control unit damaged
control unit is damaged unit
3 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System 159


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2.2.2 Rearview camera not working


No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check rearview camera Rearview camera fuse
Proceed to Step 1. Replace the fuse
fuse blown
Check the power supply of
1 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
rearview camera
Check whether the circuit
The rearview camera
of the rearview camera is Proceed to Step 2. Repair the circuit
circuit short or open
normal
2 Check the rearview camera Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the
Rearview camera Replace the rearview
rearview camera is Proceed to Step 3.
damaged camera
damaged
3 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

2.3 Removal and installation of rearview camera


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Remove back door lower trim panel assembly => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 88; Back door;
Removal and installation of the back door lower trim panel assembly.
3. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow A- of the rearview camera.
4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow B- of the back door and
disengage the connection between the connector and the back door
metal plate.

160 Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and remove the cover plate -1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 4 Nm

6. Press the fixing clip in the direction of -Arrow- and remove the
camera -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check functions of the rearview camera after installation.

Repair Group 67 - Parking Distance Control System 161


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

68 Anti-theft Security System


1 Anti-theft Alarm System
1.1 Brief introduction
1.1.1 General descriptions
Start the vehicle with a mechanical key

Control

Door not closing switch


Door not closing switch
Right front door lock
Right side turn signal
High-tone horn and

Right rear door lock


Sharing of information

low-tone horns

lamp
Fuel pump

Anti-theft base Intelligent remote


Engine control key
Ignition coil
unit

Tailgate lock
BCM

Not closing switch

Instrument cluster

Hood micro-open
switch
Left side turn signal

Left front door lock

Left rear door lock

Door not closing


Door not closing

On-board
switch
lamp

switch

information center

1. The vehicle applies following anti-theft measures.


2. A multi-point and combined anti-theft system is built for the vehicle model based on its on-board network system that
is able to realize anti-theft local alarm and remote alarm.
3. The anti-theft coil will sense the wrong key security code when the improper ignition key is inserted into the ignition,
and send out signals to the body control module and Electronic Control Unit (ECU) to prevent the engine from starting
and the vehicle from being stolen.
4. When the vehicle locking anti-theft system is ON, the anti-theft is started automatically in case of illegal entry with
warning of high-tone horn and low-tone horns.
5. If the engine is shut down under the case, the engine control unit receives anti-theft status command from the body
controller to prevent start of engine and realize the anti-theft purpose.
6. When the vehicle anti-theft is not triggered, the body controller sends anti-theft OFF command to the engine control
unit and the engine will work normally.

162 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1.1.2 Overview of anti-theft system functions


Triggering conditions of the alarm status
The vehicle enters anti-theft status when it is locked with the remote key, when all doors, hood and the back door are under
the monitoring status. The alarm is triggered once any door, back door or the hood is open, for instance any vehicle door is
opened forcibly.
After the anti-theft alarm is triggered, all turn signals flash and high-tone horn and low-tone horns honk.
Release method after triggering of the alarm status
When unlocking button on the remote key is pressed, the anti-theft alarm status is released, turn signals stop flashing,
high-tone horn and low-tone horns stop honking and the vehicle is unlocked.

1.2 Technical parameters


Tightening torque
Torque
Name Specification Grade Tools
Nm
10mm Hexagon
Body controller fixing nut M6×1.0 8 6~8
Sleeve
The fixing screw of the steering column lower guard — — 1.3~1.9 —
The fixing screw of the ignition lock key switch — — 2~3 —

1.3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting


The high-tone horn stops honking when the anti-theft alarm is triggered
No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check horn fuse Proceed to Step 1. Fuse blown Replace the fuse
1 Check the horn Normal There's a fault Operation methods
High-tone horn and
Check whether the speaker
Proceed to Step 2. low-tone horns Replace the horn
is damaged
damaged
Check the horn control
2 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
circuit
Check whether the horn Horn circuit short or Repair the horn control
Proceed to Step 3.
circuit is faulty open circuit
Check the vehicle body
3 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
controller
Check for fault of the body Replace the vehicle
Proceed to Step 4. Body controller fault
controller body controller
4 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.
All turn signals stop flashing when the anti-theft alarm is triggered

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 163


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

No. Inspection steps Check results


0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check body controller fuse Proceed to Step 1. Fuse blown Replace the fuse
Check the turn signal
1 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
control circuit
Check whether the turn The turn signal circuit Repair the control
Proceed to Step 2.
signal circuit is faulty short or open circuit of the turn signal
Check the vehicle body
2 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
controller
Check for fault of the body Replace the vehicle
Proceed to Step 3. Body controller fault
controller body controller
3 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

1.4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code


1.4.1 DTC Fault Code List
Fault Code Definition
U007300 PCAN bus closed
U100700 BCAN bus closed
U010000 Loss of communication with EMS
U010100 Loss of communication with TCU
U015500 Loss of communication with MIU (ICM)
U016400 Loss of communication with ACC
U023100 Loss of communication with RLS
U015100 Loss of communication with SDM
U100587 Network management limp
B110004 Internal faults
B111651 EOL not programmed
B111717 Battery Voltage is Too High
B111716 Lower battery voltage
B111B71 Trunk release switch stuck
B11271D Right front window output overcurrent
B11281D Right rear window output overcurrent
B11291D Left rear window output overcurrent
B113600 EMS transmission defective

164 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Fault Code Definition


B113912 Horn output short to power supply
B113914 Horn output short to ground or open
B114111 Rearview mirror folding/unfolding switch stuck
B11841D Driver’s window output overcurrent

1.4.2 U007300 PCAN Bus Closed U100700 BCAN Bus Closed U010000 Loss of Communication
with EMS U010100 Loss of Communication with TCU U015100 Loss of Communication with
SDM U015500 Loss of Communication with MIU (ICM) U016400 Loss of Communication with
ACC U024500 Loss of Communication with EHU (HUM) U015100 Loss of Communication with
SDM U100587 Network Management Limp B111651 EOL Not Programmed B113600 EMS
Transmission Defective
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 No successful information  Communication
transmission of two connection fault
U007300 PCAN bus closed —
continuous buses under the  Wire fault
busoff status  Control unit fault
 No successful information  Communication
transmission of two connection fault
U100700 BCAN bus closed —
continuous buses under the  Wire fault
busoff status  Control unit fault
 Communication
 BCM cannot receive
Loss of communication connection fault
U010000 — 0x1A0 frame within
with EMS  Wire fault
continuous 15S
 Control unit fault
 Communication
 BCM cannot receive
Loss of communication connection fault
U010100 — 0x3E0 frame within
with TCU  Wire fault
continuous 15S
 Control unit fault
 Communication
 BCM cannot receive
Loss of communication connection fault
U015500 — 0x620 frame within
with MIU (ICM)  Wire fault
continuous 15S
 Control unit fault

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 165


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Communication
 BCM cannot receive
Loss of communication connection fault
U016400 — 0x530 frame within
with ACC  Wire fault
continuous 15S
 Control unit fault
 Communication
 BCM cannot receive
Loss of communication connection fault
U015100 — 0x350 frame within
with SDM  Wire fault
continuous 15S
 Control unit fault
 Communication
Network management  Limphome status lasts for connection fault
U100587 —
limp 2000ms  Wire fault
 Control unit fault
 Communication
 Read EOL data with the connection fault
B111651 EOL not programmed —
ignition ON, Bit0 is 0  Wire fault
 Control unit fault
 With the ignition ON,
 Communication
EMS challenge request
EMS transmission connection fault
B113600 — frame is not received
defective  Wire fault
within 2s following
 Control unit fault
successful verification
Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect body controller connectors T40a, T15, T18c, T9 and T40b, check body controller connectors T40a, T15, T18c,
T9, and T40b for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check whether the fuses FB48 (7.5A), FB41 (5A), FB20 (25A), FB22 (25A), FB19 (25A), FB21 (25A), FB18 (30A),
FB23 (25A) and FB17 (25A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 3.

166 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. With the ignition under ON status, check whether the voltage between
pin T40a/18 of the body controller connector and the body grounding is
the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Check whether the voltage between pin T40a/19 of the body


controller connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 167


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the voltage
between pins T9/1, T9/2, T9/3 and T9/4 of body controller connector and
the body grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 6.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

6. Check whether the voltage between pins T9/6 and T9/9 of body
controller connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

168 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. Check whether the wire between pin T40b/5 of the body controller
connector and the body grounding is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Check whether wires between pins T15/2, T15/7, T15/9 and T15/14
of the body controller connector and the body grounding are
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 9.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 169


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether the wires between pins T18c/7 and T18c/15 of the
body controller connector and the body grounding are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 10.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

10. Check whether the wire between pin T40a/20 of the body controller
connector and pin T6i/ST2 of the ignition connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

170 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

11. Disconnect instrument cluster connector T32a and check whether


wires between pins T40a/36 and T40a/37 of the body controller
connector and pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 12.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

12. Disconnect the engine control unit connector T112 and check
whether wires between pins T112/17 and T112/1 of the engine control
unit connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of the body controller
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 13.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 171


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

13. Disconnect connector T24a of the automatic transmission control


unit and check whether wires between pins T24a/7 and T24a/17 of the
automatic transmission control unit connector and pins T40a/9 and
T40a/8 of the body controller connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 14.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

14. Check whether wires between pins T16j/11 and T16j/3 of the OBD
diagnostic interface connector and pins T40b/36 and T40b/37 of the
body controller connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 15.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

15. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.3 B110004 system internal fault


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 EEPROM error, RAM
B110004 Internal faults — detects error and SPI  Control unit fault
communication defective

172 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps:
1. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes, find out the reasons from other symptoms.
− No, replace the body controller.

1.4.4 B111717 Battery Overvoltage B111716 Battery Undervoltage


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 The power supply voltage
Battery Voltage is Too  Wire fault
B111717 — is constantly higher than
High  Control unit fault
16V for more than 500ms
 The power supply voltage
 Wire fault
B111716 Lower battery voltage — is constantly lower than 9V
 Control unit fault
for more than 500ms

Diagnostic steps:
Check whether the battery charging circuit is normal and check whether the terminal is loose or corrosive.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire and tighten or clean the terminal.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check whether the fuses FB48 (7.5A), FB41 (5A), FB20 (25A), FB22 (25A), FB19 (25A), FB21 (25A), FB18 (30A),
FB23 (25A) and FB17 (25A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 3.
3. Check whether the battery voltage is within the normal range.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No-Overhaul or replace the battery.
4. Disconnect body controller connectors T40a, T15, T18c, T9 and T40b, check body controller connectors T40a, T15, T18c,
T9, and T40b for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 173


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. With the ignition under ON status, check whether the voltage


between pin T40a/18 of the body controller connector and the body
grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 6.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

6. Check whether the voltage between pin T40a/19 of the body


controller connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

174 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the voltage
between pins T9/1, T9/2, T9/3 and T9/4 of body controller connector
and the body grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Check whether the voltage between pins T9/6 and T9/9 of body
controller connector and the body grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 9.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 175


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether the wire between pin T40b/5 of the body controller
connector and the body grounding is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 10.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

10. Check whether wires between pins T15/2, T15/7, T15/9 and T15/14
of the body controller connector and the body grounding are
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

176 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

11. Check whether the wires between pins T18c/7 and T18c/15 of the
body controller connector and the body grounding are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 12.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

12. Check whether the wire between pin T40a/20 of the body controller
connector and pin T6i/ST2 of the ignition connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 13.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

13. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.5 U023100 Loss of Communication with RLS


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Communication
Loss of communication  ―RLS_LIN‖ node is lost connection fault
U023100 —
with RLS for continuous 2s  Wire fault
 Control unit fault

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 177


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect rain sensor connector T4b, check rain sensor connector T4b for crack and abnormality and check the pins for
corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check whether fuse FB41 (5A) in the instrument panel electrical box is blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 3.
3. With the ignition under ON status, check whether the voltage between
pin T4b/1 of the rain sensor connector and the body grounding is the
battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40a and check whether the


wire between pin T4b/2 of the rain sensor connector and pin T40a/16 of
the body controller connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

178 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T4b/2
of the rain sensor connector is short to the positive terminal of the
battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

7. Check whether the pin T4b/2 of the rain sensor connector is short to
the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 8.

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 179


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8. Check whether pin T4b/3 of the rain sensor connector and the body
grounding is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 9.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

9. Replace the rain sensor and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and
its symptoms remain.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 10.
− No-Replace the rain sensor.
10. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.6 B11841D Driver’s Window Output Overcurrent


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, the
Driver’s window motor is overcurrent for  Wire fault
B11841D —
output overcurrent 200ms when the driver’s  Control unit fault
window output is OFF.

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect connector T2dj of the left front door window regulator motor, check connector T2dj of the left front door
window regulator motor for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

180 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller


connector T15 and check whether the wires between pins T2dj/2 and
T2dj/1 of the left front door window regulator motor connector and pins
T15/15 and T15/12 of body controller connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Check whether pins T2dj/2 and T2dj/1 of the left front door window
regulator motor connector are short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

4. Replace the left front regulator switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No-Replace the left front regulator switch.
5. Check whether power supply and grounding of the left front door window regulator motor are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 6.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
6. Replace the left front door window regulator motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No-Replace the left front door window regulator motor.
7. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 181


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.


− No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.7 B11271D Right Front Window Output Overcurrent


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, the
motor is overcurrent for
Right front window  Wire fault
B11271D — 200ms when the
output overcurrent  Control unit fault
passenger’s window output
is OFF.
Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect connector T2dh of right front door window regulator motor, check connector T2dh of right front door window
regulator motor for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller
connector T15 and check whether wires between pins T2dh/1 and
T2dh/2 of the right front door window regulator motor connector and
pins T15/13 and T15/10 of the body controller connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

182 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Check whether pins T2dh/1 and T2dh/2 of the right front door
window regulator motor connector are short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

4. Replace the right front door window regulator motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No-Replace the right front door window regulator motor.
5. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.8 B11281D Right Rear Window Output Overcurrent


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, the
Right rear window motor is overcurrent for  Wire fault
B11281D —
output overcurrent 200ms when the right rear  Control unit fault
window output is OFF.

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect connector T2df of right rear door window regulator motor, check connector T2df of right rear door window
regulator motor for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 183


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller


connector T15 and check whether wires between pins T2df/1 and T2df/2
of the right rear door window regulator motor connector and pins T15/6
and T15/3 of the body controller connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

3. Check whether pins T2df/1 and T2df/2 of the right rear door window
regulator motor connector are short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

4. Replace the right rear door window regulator motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No-Replace the right rear door window regulator motor.
5. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

184 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1.4.9 B11291D Left Rear Window Output Overcurrent


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, the
Left rear window motor is overcurrent for  Wire fault
B11291D —
output overcurrent 200ms when the left rear  Control unit fault
window output is OFF.
Diagnostic steps:
1.4 Disconnect left rear door window regulator motor connector T2db, check left rear door window regulator motor
connector T2db for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller
connector T15 and check whether wires between pins T2db/1 and
T2db/2 of the left rear door window regulator motor connector and pins
T15/1 and T15/4 of the body controller connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 185


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Check whether pins T2db/1 and T2db/2 of the left rear door window
regulator motor connector are short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

4. Replace the left rear door window regulator motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No-Replace the left rear door window regulator motor.
5. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.10 B113912 Horn Output Short to Power Supply B113914 Horn Output Short to Ground or
Open
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, horn
Horn output short to relay is short to power  Wire fault
B113912 —
power supply supply for 200ms when the  Control unit fault
output is valid.
 With the ignition ON, horn
Horn output short to relay is short to ground or  Wire fault
B113914 —
ground or open open for 200ms when the  Control unit fault
output is invalid.

Diagnostic steps:
1. Check whether the fuse FB07 (15A) in the instrument panel electrical box is blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.

186 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

− No Proceed to step 2.
Check the high beam relay J109, check the horn relay J109 for crack and abnormality and check the terminal for corrosion
and rust.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No-Replace the horn relay J109 and clean the terminal.
3. Check whether the horn relay J109 is normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No Replace the horn relay J109.

Conditions Multimeter connecting pins Rated value


Constant state Common status 85-86 Connectivity
Between pin 85 and pin 86, apply
30-87 Connectivity
supply voltage

4. Disconnect body controller connector T40b and front compartment


electrical box connector T14a and check whether the wire between pin
T14a/1 of the front compartment electrical box connector and pin
T40b/23 of the body controller connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 187


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T14a/1
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether the pin T14a/1 of the front compartment electrical box
connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

188 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. Disconnect low-tone horn connector T2ab and high-tone horn


connector T2ac and check whether wires between pin T14a/11 of the
front compartment electrical box connector and pin T2ab/1 of low-tone
horn connector and pin T2ac/1 of high-tone horn connector are
conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Disconnect battery negative cable, and check whether the pin T14a/11
of the front compartment electrical box connector is short to the positive
terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 9.

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 189


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether the pin T14a/11 of the front compartment electrical


box connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 10.

10. Replace the high-tone horn and low-tone horn, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No-Replace the high-tone horn and low-tone horn.
11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.11 B114111 Rearview mirror folding/unfolding switch stuck


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
Rearview mirror  With the ignition ON,
 Wire fault
B114111 folding/unfolding — rearview mirror folding
 Control unit fault
switch stuck switch is valid for 15s.

DTC detection procedures:


Diagnostic steps:

Tips
After the fault is solved, verify DTC again and check whether the symptom is still present.
1. Replace the rearview mirror adjustment switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 6.
− No-Replace the rearview mirror adjustment switch.
2. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.

190 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.


− No-Replace the body controller.

1.4.12 B111B71 Trunk release switch stuck


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 With the ignition ON, rear
Trunk release switch  Wire fault
B111B71 — back door unlocking
stuck  Control unit fault
button is valid for 15s.

DTC detection procedures:


Diagnostic steps:

Tips
After the fault is solved, verify DTC again and check whether the symptom is still present.

1. Disconnect trunk door lock motor connector T4p, check trunk door lock motor connector T4p for crack and abnormality
and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, disconnect body controller
connector T40b and check whether the wire between pin T4p/D of the
trunk door lock motor connector and pin T40b/30 of the body controller
connector is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 191


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Check whether the pin T4p/D of the trunk door lock motor connector
is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

4. Replace the trunk door lock motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No-Replace the trunk door lock motor.
5. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

192 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1.5 Overview of the anti-theft system

1 - Anti-theft base 2 - Body controller


 Check, replace if necessary  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 194
3 - Back door open button 4 - Back door lock assembly
 Check, replace if necessary  Removal and installation => Vehicle body and
painting; Repair Group: 88; Back door; Removal
and installation of the back door lock body assembly
5 - Rear door switch 6 - Back door lock assembly
 Check, replace if necessary  Removal and installation => Vehicle body and
painting; Repair Group: 87; Rear door; Removal and
installation of the rear door lock body assembly
7 - Front door switch 8 -Front door lock assembly
 Check, replace if necessary  Removal and installation => Vehicle body and
painting; Repair Group: 86; Front door; Removal
and installation of front door lock assembly
9 - Engine hood master lock body assembly
 Removal and installation => Vehicle body and
painting; Repair Group: 81; Hood: Removal and
installation of hood master lock body assembly

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 193


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1.6 Removal and installation of body controller


Removal
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Removal of the left lower trim panel of the instrument panel=>Body and painting;Repair group:82;Instrument
panel;Removal and installation of the left lower trim panel of the instrument panel
3. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow- of the fuse box -1- and put the fuse
box aside.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M6×1.0×25
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 10 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve

4. Press the locking clip of the connector -1- and disengage the
connector from the body controller -2-.
5. Unscrew the nut -Arrow- and remove the body controller -2- with a
bracket from the vehicle body.
Nut - Arrow- specification:M6×1.0
Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 8 Nm
Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 10mm hexagon sleeve

6. Press the fixing clip in the direction of -Arrow- and disengage the
body controller -1- from the bracket-2-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

194 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Set the ignition ON (not necessarily to start the engine) after replacement of the body controller and configure the body
control unit according to hints of the diagnostic tester.
Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

2 Ignition Switch Assembly


2.1 Removal and installation of the steering column lock assembly
Tips
Steering column lock cylinder and steering column are integrated that are inseparable.
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Adjust the steering column to its limit position.
3. Remove ignition=> Refer to page 196.
4. Disengage the fixing clip -Arrow C- of the combination switch
harness from the steering column.
5. Disconnect fixing strip -1- of key anti-forgotten switch harness,
disengage the connection -Arrow A- between the connecting plug of the
key anti-forgotten switch harness and the harness, and remove the
anti-forgotten switch -2-.
Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

6. Disengage the connection between the connecting plug -Arrow- of the


anti-theft base and the steering column.
7. Disconnect the connection between the connecting plug of the
anti-theft base and the harness.

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 195


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8. Disengage fixing clip -Arrow- of the anti-theft base and remove the
anti-theft base -1-.
9. Disengage fixing clip of the combination switch harness from the
steering column lock assembly.

10. Unscrew anti-theft bolt -Arrow- with tools and remove the steering
column lock -1-.

Tips
Tightening torque for bolt -Arrow-: tighten the anti-theft bolt until the
cracking part is twisted off.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

2.2 Removal and installation of ignition switch


1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Adjust the steering column to its limit position.
3. Disengage the connection between steering column upper guard -1-
and the instrument panel.

196 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. Disengage the connection between steering column upper guard -1-


and steering column lower guard-2- and remove the steering column
upper guard -1-.

4. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the steering column lower


guard and remove the steering column lower guard.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 1.3 - 1.9 Nm

6. Disconnect the ignition switch connecting plug -Arrow-A.


7. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow B- of the ignition and remove the
ignition-1-.
Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System 197


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3 Oil Line Automatic Cut-off System

Control

Sharing of information
Right front Right rear
Ignition coil
door lock door lock

Engine BCM Airbag


control unit controller

Fuel pump Left front Left rear door Collision


door lock lock sensor

When the airbag controller detects crash after the vehicle happens to a crash, it feeds back a crash signal to the body
controller as long as the force of crash arrives at the critical point of airbag explosion and then the body controller sends the
crash signal fed from the airbag controller to the engine control unit in a way of gateway route that cuts off working circuit
of the fuel pump.

Tips
The body controller unlocks all door locks when it receives the crash signal fed from the airbag controller at the time of
crash. Thus it provides considerate safety and protection for both driver and passengers.

198 Repair Group 68 - Anti-theft Security System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

69 Audio Visual System


1 Brief introduction
1.1 General descriptions
The audio visual system is powered by the battery through the ignition, which may be started when the ignition is ON or
ACC. When DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna receives FM or AM broadcasting, it sends to the audio system for
processing and later the speakers produce the sound. The audio system is made up of the following parts:
 DA machine/AUDIO machine
 Two tweeters
 Two front door full-range speakers
 Two rear door full-range speakers
 DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna
 Multi-functional screen

1.2 Precautions
Radio wave band
Radio wave AM FM
Method of modulation Amplitude modulation Frequency modulation
Wave band AM1,AM2 FM1, FM2,FM3
Frequency range 531~1602KHZ 87.5~108.0MHZ

2 Technical parameters
Tightening torque
Torque
Name Specification Grade Tools
Nm
Fixing screw of DA machine/AUDIO machine — — 3.8~4.4 —
Fixing screw of the door speakers — — 1.6~1.9 —
8mm Hexagon
Antenna Amplifier Fixing Bolt M6×1.0×12 — 8~10
Sleeve

3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting


3.1 The radio has no sound output in working
No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System 199


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

No. Inspection steps Check results


Check whether the radio
Proceed to Step 1. Fuse blown Replace the fuse
fuse is blown
1 Check the radio connector Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the radio The radio connector
connector is loose or the Proceed to Step 2. loose or the terminal Repair the connector
terminal is corroded corroded
Check the line supply
2 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
voltage
Check whether supply The supply voltage for
Repair the power
voltage for the radio circuit Proceed to Step 3. radio circuit short or
supply circuit
is normal open
3 Check the radio Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the radio is
Proceed to Step 4. The radio damaged Replace the radio
damaged
4 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

3.2 The radio is not working


No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the radio
Proceed to Step 1. Fuse blown Replace the fuse
fuse is damaged
Check the line supply
1 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
voltage
Check whether supply The supply voltage for
Repair the power
voltage for the radio circuit Proceed to Step 2. radio circuit short or
supply circuit
is normal open
2 Check the radio Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the radio is Replace the radio and
Proceed to Step 3. The radio damaged
damaged test
3 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

3.3 Station signals can't be received


No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the radio
No connection or Reconnect the radio
antenna connector has Proceed to Step 1.
contact poor antenna connector
good connection
1 Check the radio antenna Normal There's a fault Operation methods

200 Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

No. Inspection steps Check results


Check whether the radio
Replace the radio
antenna conductive Proceed to Step 2. Radio antenna open
antenna
normally
Check the radio antenna
2 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
amplifier
Check whether the radio
Radio antenna Replace the shark fin
antenna amplifier is Proceed to Step 3.
amplifier damaged antenna
normal
3 Check the radio Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the radio is Replace the radio and
Proceed to Step 4. The radio damaged
damaged test
4 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code


4.1 DTC fault code list
Fault Code Definition
U014000 Loss of communication with BCM
U015500 Loss of communication with MIU
U010000 Loss of communication with EMS
U100700 Bus is turned off
U100587 Network management fault
B160009 CAN signal line fault
B111717 The battery voltage is too high
B111716 The battery voltage is too low
U170187 Bluetooth module fault

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System 201


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.2 U014000 Loss of Communication with BCM U015500 Loss of Communication with MIU
U010000 Loss of Communication with EMS U100700 Bus Closed U100700 CAN Bus Closed Fault
U100587 Network Management Fault B160009 CAN Signal Line Fault
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 BCM message (0x4A0) is
Loss of communication lost by 10-time double  Wire fault
U014000 —
with BCM period  Control unit fault
 Power mode is RUN for 5s
 ICM message (0x620) is
Loss of communication lost for 10-time double  Wire fault
U015500 —
with MIU period  Control unit fault
 Power mode is RUN for 5s
 EMS message (0x3A0) is
Loss of communication lost for 10-time double  Wire fault
U010000 —
with EMS period  Control unit fault
 Power mode is RUN for 5s
 CAN Busoff is entered
twice continuously  Wire fault
U100700 Bus is turned off —
 After the power mode is  Control unit fault
ACC or RUN for 5s
 NM is under limphome
Network management status for more than 2s  Wire fault
U100587 —
fault  After the power mode is  Control unit fault
ACC or RUN for 5s
 CAN_H or CAN_L short
or open  Wire fault
B160009 CAN signal line fault —
 After the power mode is  Control unit fault
ACC or RUN for 5s

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect audio control unit connectors T20e, T8c and T8d, check audio control unit connectors T20e, T8c and T8d for
crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.

202 Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.


− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check whether the fuses FB28 (10A) and FB48 (7.5A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 3.
3. With the ignition under ACC status, check whether the voltage
between pin T8c/5 of the audio control unit connector and the body
grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

4. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the voltage
between pin T8c/7 of the audio control unit connector and the body
grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System 203


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether the wire between pin T8c/8 of the audio control unit
connector and the body grounding is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 6.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

6. Disconnect body controller connector T40b and check whether the


wires between pins T40b/36 and T40b/37 of the body controller
connector and pins T20e/10 and T20e/9 of the audio control unit
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

204 Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. Disconnect instrument cluster connector T32a and check whether


wires between pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster
connector and pins T20e/10,T20e/9 of the audio control unit connector
are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Disconnect the engine control unit connector T112 and check whether
wires between pins T112/17 and T112/1 of the engine control unit
connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of the body controller
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 9.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System 205


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether wires between pins T16j/11 and T16j/3 of the OBD
diagnostic interface connector and T20e/10 and T20e/9 of the audio
control unit connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 10.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

10. Replace the audio controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code
and its symptoms remain.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No-Replace the audio control unit.
11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

4.3 U170187 Bluetooth Communication Fault


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 The Bluetooth
module may be
 Module connection fault
faulty
 Power supply supplies
 The connection
Bluetooth power with normal voltage
U170187 — between the
communication fault (9V-16V)
Bluetooth module
 After the power mode is
and micro control
ACC or RUN for 5s
unit may be faulty
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Replace the audio controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code
and its symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the audio control unit.

206 Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.4 B111717 Battery Overvoltage B111716 Battery Undervoltage


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Battery voltage is > 16V
The battery voltage is for 500ms  Wire fault
B111717 —
too high  After the power mode is  Control unit fault
ACC or RUN for 5s
 Battery voltage is < 9V for
The battery voltage is 500ms  Wire fault
B111716 —
too low  After the power mode is  Control unit fault
ACC or RUN for 5s

Diagnostic steps:
Diagnostic steps:
Check whether the battery charging circuit is normal and check whether the terminal is loose or corrosive.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire and tighten or clean the terminal.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check whether the fuses FB28 (10A) and FB48 (7.5A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown.
− Yes - Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 3.
3. Check whether the battery voltage is within the normal range.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No-Overhaul or replace the battery.
4. Disconnect audio control unit connectors T20e, T8c and T8d, check audio control unit connectors T20e, T8c and T8d for
crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System 207


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. With the ignition under ACC status, check whether the voltage
between pin T8c/5 of the audio control unit connector and the body
grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 6.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

6. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the voltage
between pin T8c/7 of the audio control unit connector and the body
grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

208 Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. Check whether the wire between pin T8c/8 of the audio control unit
connector and the body grounding is conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

8. Replace the audio controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code
and its symptoms remain.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 9.
− No-Replace the audio control unit.
9. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the body controller.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System 209


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5 Overview of Audio Visual System

1 - DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna 2 - Multi-functional display


 The radio antenna on the rear windscreen is integrated  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 220
with the rear windscreen
3 - DA machine/AUDIO machine 4 - Multi-functional switch of the steering wheel (left)
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 210  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 220
5 - Multi-functional switch of the steering wheel (right) 6 - Front door full-range speakers
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 220  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 213
7 - Rear door full-range speakers 8 - Tweeters
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 214  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 213

6 Removal and installation of the DA machine/AUDIO machine


Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

210 Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Plastic skid plate

Removal
1. Remove trim panels -1- and -2- at both sides of DA machine/AUDIO
machine.

2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of DA machine/AUDIO machine


and pull out DA machine/AUDIO machine -1-.

Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 3.8 - 4.4 Nm

Tips
Extract the DA machine/AUDIO machine assembly carefully until the
connecting plug of DA machine/AUDIO machine can be removed.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System 211


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect connector -Arrow- of the hazard warning light switch.


4. Disconnect connectors -2- to -7- and remove DA machine/AUDIO
machine -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Set the ignition ON (not necessarily to start the engine) after replacement of DA machine/AUDIO machine and configure
DA machine/AUDIO machine according to hints of the diagnostic tester.
Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

7 USB/HDMI Interface
7.1 Overview of USB interface and HDMI interface
USB interface/HDMI interface
Support play of files in the formats of MP3, WMA, WMV, AVI and MPEG-4. When the UBS carrying files in any of the
above format is inserted, the machine will switch automatically to USB play mode (the priority of file formats is:
video/audio/photo) and the screen will display USB status, including ―Song Name‖, ―Performer‖, ―Album Name‖, ―Playing
Schedule‖, etc. Support play of iPod player. You may operate iPod player on the display interface of the multi-functional
display. You may directly connect you portable music player to USB interface and HDMI interface on the front panel. When
any external sound source is applied, its play is under the control of the external sound source.

7.2 Removal and installation of the HAMI interface


The HDMI interface located on the operation panel of DA machine/AUDIO machine cannot be removed.

7.3 Removal and installation of the USB interface


The USB interface located on the operation panel of DA machine/AUDIO machine cannot be removed.

212 Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8 Speaker
8.1 Removal and installation of the tweeter
Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left tweeter, but may serve as a reference for the right side.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.


2. Remove trim panel on the A-pillar => Vehicle body and painting: Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment: Trim part
and trim panel; Removal and installation of the trim panel on the A-pillar.
2. Disengage the fixing clip -Arrow- and remove the left tweeter -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check functions of the speaker after installation.

8.2 Removal and installation of the front door full-range speaker


Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for removal and installation of the left front door full-range speaker, but may serve as a reference for
removal and installation of the right front door full-range speaker.

1. Remove the left front door trim panel=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:86; Front door; Removal and
installation of front door trim panel

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System 213


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow A- of the left front door


full-range speaker.
3. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow B- of the left front door full-range
speaker and remove the left front door full-range speaker-1-.

Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 1.6 - 1.9 Nm

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check functions of the door speaker after installation.

8.3 Removal and installation of the rear door full-range speaker


Removal
Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left rear front door full band speaker, but may serve as a
reference for the right side.

1. Remove the left rear door trim panel=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:87; Rear door; Removal and
installation of rear door trim panel
2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the left rear door full-range
speaker and remove the left door full-range speaker-1-.
Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 1.6 - 1.9 Nm

214 Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Disengage connector -Arrow- of the full-range speaker and remove


the full-range speaker-1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check functions of the door speaker after installation.

9 Radio Antenna
9.1 Overview of DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna

1 - DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna 2 - Antenna Amplifier

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System 215


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

 Check, replace as necessary  Check, replace as necessary


Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 217
3 - Antenna cable 1-. 4 - Antenna cable 2-.
 Check: replace the antenna assembly together if  Check: replace the antenna assembly together if
necessary. necessary.
5 - DA machine/AUDIO machine
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 210

216 Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9.2 Removal and installation of the antenna amplifier


Removal
1. Remove back door upper trim panel -1-.

2. Disengage the connection between the antenna amplifier -1- and the
rear window antenna from the position -Arrow A-.
3. Pull out and disconnect the connecting plug of the antenna cable -2-,
unscrew the bolt -Arrow B- and remove the bolt -Arrow- of antenna
amplifier-1- in the size: M6×1.0×12
Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque:8±10 Nm
Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check reception function of the radio antenna after installation.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System 217


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9.3 Overhaul of DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna


Brief Introduction:

Tips
 Antenna of DA machine/AUDIO machine is irreparable. The damaged antenna cable of DA machine/AUDIO machine
must be replaced with the antenna cable of DA machine/AUDIO machine provided as original part only.
 This maintenance solution can also be employed as a solution for inspection or installation of equipment.

Use a new antenna cable of DA machine/AUDIO machine to replace the damaged antenna cable of DA machine/AUDIO
machine:
1. Disengage connector of the damaged DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna cable from the equipment.
2. Find the route of damaged DA machine/AUDIO machine antenna cable on the vehicle, and take out the antenna cable of
DA machine/AUDIO machine.
3. Install the new antenna cable of DA machine/AUDIO machine along layout of the original antenna.
4. Perform function tests.

Tips
The antenna cable of DA machine/AUDIO machine should not be buckled or bent excessively! Bending radius should be at
least 50mm.

218 Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

10 Steering Wheel
10.1 Functions of multi-functional steering wheel buttons

1. Channel search up/last music function button


2. Volume increase button
3. Channel search down/next music function button
4. ON / OFF‖: cruise master switch that controls ON/OFF of cruise function.
The cruise indicator in the instrument lights up indicates it is ON; The cruise indicator in the instrument goes out
indicates it is OFF.
5. ―RES ACCEL‖: to accelerate or restore cruise function
The precondition is that the master switch must be ―ON‖ and the speed is the last memory speed
6. ―CANCEL‖: to release cruise
But the vehicle speed will be memorized; if the main switch is pressed to the position ―OFF‖, the memorized vehicle
speed will be cleared, and a new speed has to be set next time).
7. SET COAST‖: to speed down or set the current speed as the cruise speed
The precondition is that the master switch is ON‖
8. Volume Down button.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System 219


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

10.2 Removal and installation of the multi-functional steering wheel buttons


Removal
1. Remove driver airbag => Refer to page 291.
2. Disengage connector -Arrow A- of multi-functional steering wheel
buttons.
3. Disengage trim panel -1- of the multi-functional steering wheel from
the position of -Arrow B- and remove the trim panel of the
multi-functional steering wheel.

4. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and remove the multi-functional buttons


-1- and -2-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 1 - 2 Nm

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check functions of the steering wheel multi-functional switch after installation.

11. Removal and installation of the multi-functional display


Removal
1. Disconnect battery negative cable => Refer to page 7.

220 Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Remove trim panel -1- of the multi-functional display from the


position of -Arrow-.

3. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and pull out the multi-functional display
-1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2.5 - 3.5 Nm
4. Disengage the connecting plug of the multi-functional display and
remove the multi-functional display.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check functions of the display after installation.

Repair Group 69 - Audio Visual System 221


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

70 AVN Navigation System


1 Brief introduction
The vehicle has employed an autonomous navigation system based on GPS that is more reliable than ordinary ones, by
which a more accurate positioning can be achieved via satellite wave positioning (GPS navigation).This ensures that the
driver knows their current location and direction of travel, thus allowing the driver to drive at ease and in comfort.
Global positioning system is used, with full-color digital map displayed clearly on 8-Inch large screen, by which the
vehicle location can be positioned accurately.It also employs AMAP to guide the driver to search and select the best driving
route to destination.
Simple, clear and complete Chinese menu enables the driver to carry out a Quick Search with multiple methods, including
facility category, address, zip code and map, etc.
One particular satisfying feature is that real voice prompts are provided by the navigation system. After settings have been
completed, the navigation system will guide the driver to a direction with clear voice prompts, allowing one to easily and
happily reach new destinations. No matter how long the road is, happiness will be always with you.
General Instructions
GPS positioning of AVN navigation system is under the effect of weather and application site (tall
building/tunnel/underground/forest). Moreover, most GPS cannot position indoor and in basement and GPS signal cannot
penetrate through high-rise buildings and automotive heat-insulating film with metal components or similar product.
Therefore, the navigation electronic map data provided by AVN navigation system is for common consulting and reference
only. Voice prompts and intersection information are the suggestions obtained on the basis of the optimal route in electronic
map database that is for reference of the driver only. The driver must always obey local traffic rules.
Extremely high or extremely low temperature will interfere normal functions. If the vehicle parks for a long time under
direct solar radiation or in any cold area while its engine is shut down, the vehicle could become extremely hot or extremely
cold and the entertainment and navigation system may function abnormally under the environment. Normal functions are
recovered once the interior temperature returns to the normal scope.
The navigation control system of the vehicle is mainly composed of the following components:
 AVN navigation reception unit
 7-inch color display with touch screen
 GPS antenna
 USB play interface/HAMI interface
 Multifunction steering wheel

2 Technical parameters
Tightening torque
Torque
Name Specification Grade Tools
Nm
Fixing screw of AVN navigation — — 3.8~4.4 —
GPS antenna fixation screw — — 3.8~4.4 —

222 Repair Group 70 - AVN Navigation System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3 Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting


3.1 Navigation voice cannot be heard
No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the volume Volume of navigation
Adjust to a suitable
of navigation voice is Proceed to Step 1. voice not adjusted to a
level
adjusted to a suitable level suitable level
Check navigation
1 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
connector
Check whether the
The navigation
navigation connector is
Proceed to Step 2. connector loose or the Repair the connector
loose or the terminal is
terminal corroded
corroded
2 Inspect the speaker Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the speaker Repair the harness or
Proceed to Step 3. Speaker fault
is faulty replace the speaker
3 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

3.2 GPS mark no display


No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether there are Drive the vehicle to a
Proceed to Step 1. Obstacles around
obstacles around place without obstacles
1 Check the GPS Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether there are
Objects on top of the
objects on top of the GPS Proceed to Step 2. Remove the objects
GPS antenna
antenna
2 Check the radio device Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the radio
receiver is installed Remove or change its
Proceed to Step 3. Radio receiver installed
(e.g.anti-theft device and position
radar, etc.)
3 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

Repair Group 70 - AVN Navigation System 223


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4 Overview of AVN Navigation System

1 - AVN navigation radio antenna 2 - Multi-functional display


 Used for the radio  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 220
 The radio antenna located on the rear windscreen is
integrated with the rear windscreen
3 - GPS navigation antenna 4 - AVN navigation
 Used for navigation system  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 225
 Located under the central part of the instrument
panel => Refer to page 226
5 - Multi-functional switch of the steering wheel (left) 6 - Multi-functional switch of the steering wheel (right)
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 220  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 220
7 - Front door full-range speakers 8 - Rear door full-range speakers
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 213  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 214
9 - Tweeters 9 - Tweeters
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 213  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 213

224 Repair Group 70 - AVN Navigation System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5 Removal and installation of the AVN navigation


Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Plastic skid plate

Removal
1. Remove trim panels -1- and -2- at both sides of AVN navigation.

2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of AVN navigation and pull out
AVN navigation -1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 3.8 - 4.4 Nm

Tips
Extract AVN navigation carefully until the connecting plug of the AVN
navigation can be removed.

Repair Group 70 - AVN Navigation System 225


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect connector -Arrow- of the hazard warning light switch.


4. Disconnect the connecting plugs -2-~-8- and remove AVN navigation
-1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Set the ignition ON (not necessarily to start the engine) after replacement of AVN navigation and configure AVN navigation
according to hints of the diagnostic tester.
Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

6 DVD Navigation Antenna


6.1 Removal and installation of GPS antenna assembly
GPS antenna is located under the central part of the instrument panel component that can be replaced only after removal of
the instrument panel component.
1. Remove instrument panel component => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 82; Instrument panel; Removal
and installation of the instrument panel component
2. Disengage fixing clip -Arrow- of GPS antenna -1- from the
instrument panel component.

226 Repair Group 70 - AVN Navigation System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and remove the GPS antenna-1-.


Tightening torque:3.8~4.4 Nm

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check reception function of the antenna after installation.

Repair Group 70 - AVN Navigation System 227


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

72 Protection System
1 Brief introduction
Protection device can improve the passive protection for passengers in the vehicle during a severe crash. This device is
usually based on the existing standard protection system (seat belt).
The airbag controller is connected with the body control module and the vehicle diagnostic connector through low speed
CAN bus.
The airbag controller determines frontal or side crash through crash sensors so as to control the operation of the protection
device.
The airbag controller is installed on the central channel under the instrument panel.
The airbag controller monitors the condition of the vehicle crash by crash sensors. The controller can identify whether the
crash is severe or slight, or whether the impact is caused by uneven road surface according to the input data, as as to ensure
the effective operation of the airbag.
If the monitored severity of the frontal impact exceeds the preset value, the airbag controller will send signals to trigger the
front airbag module and the seat belt pre-tensioner.
If side airbags are installed, two side impact sensors are needed to monitor the side crash. If the monitored severity of the
side impact exceeds the preset value, the airbag controller will send signals to trigger the corresponding side airbag module.
If side air curtains are installed, two side impact sensors are needed to monitor the side crash. If the monitored severity of
the side impact exceeds the preset value, the airbag controller will send signals to trigger the corresponding side air curtain
module.
The seat belt is the most important safety device. If used correctly, it can reduce severe injuries or deaths in various types of
crashes.
The front seat belt retractor is installed in the cavity at the bottom of B-pillar lower trim panel.Extending from the retractor,
the webbing is fixed to the mounting point on the B-pillar lower body via a manual height adjuster on the B-pillar upper
area. The height adjuster is fixed on the B-pillar by bolts. The seat belt is mounted to the height adjuster through a
D-ring.With the height adjuster sliding up and down, the seat belt is fixed in the best position under different circumstances.
The seat belt buckle assembly is installed on the bracket of the seat frame inner side.
The rear seat belt retractor is fixed on the part of body in white behind the rear seat armrest with bolts. The other end of the
webbing is fixed to the seat lower panel. The left seat belt buckle assembly is installed on the rear floor. The right seat belt
buckle assembly and the middle seat belt buckle are integrated as an assembly.
The rear central seat belt retractor is fixed inside the rear seat with bolts. The other end of the webbing is fixed to the seat
lower panel.

Danger

 The seat belt consists of belt retractor, belt buckle, height adjuster and accessories (if any), which should be
examined after each crash.
 The removal and installation of airbags and seat belts must be conducted by professional technicians.Consult the
relevant documents before operation.
 The newly installed seat belt must be examined by a professional technician to ensure of normal functioning
without any defect, otherwise it may cause personal injuries.

System Operating Principle

228 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Working principle of passenger restraint system in frontal crash:


1. The crash sensors detect crash signal in case of a crash;
2. The crash sensors transmit the crash signal to ECU;
3. The seat belt functions;
4. ECU judges the crash signal;
5. ECU sends ignition signal to pre-tensioner seat belt and the pre-tensioner seat belt starts to work (if the pre-tensioner seat
belt is installed);
6. ECU sends ignition signal to the airbag and the airbag starts to work and protect the driver or the passenger.

Protection device components:


 Airbag controller
 Driver airbag
 Front passenger airbag
 Side airbag (if installed)
 Side air curtain (if installed)
 Front Seat Belt Assembly
 Rear/middle seat belt assembly
 Side crash sensor (if installed)
 Front and rear seat belt buckle
 Clock spring
 Airbag fault warning light
 Seat belt reminder warning light

2 Technical parameters
Tightening torque
Name Specification Grade Torque Nm Tools
Fixing bolt of upper fixing point of the front seat
M10×1.25×20 8.8 40~50 17mm Hexagon Sleeve
belt assembly
Fixing bolt of lower fixing point of the front seat
M10×1.25×40 8.8 40~50 17mm Hexagon Sleeve
belt assembly
Fixing bolt component of front seat belt retractor M10×1.25×40 8.8 40~50 17mm Hexagon Sleeve
Fixing bolt component of height adjuster M10×1.25×20 8.8 40~50 17mm Hexagon Sleeve
Fixing bolt component of upper fixing point of the
M10×1.25×30 8.8 40~50 17mm Hexagon Sleeve
rear seat belt
Upper fixing bolt component of the rear seat belt
M10×1.25×80 8.8 40~50 17mm Hexagon Sleeve
retractor
Fixing bolt component of the rear double buckle
M10×1.25×30 8.8 40~50 17mm Hexagon Sleeve
assembly
Fixing bolt component of the rear single buckle
M10×1.25×30 8.8 40~50 17mm Hexagon Sleeve
assembly
Fixing nut of airbag controller M6×1.0×12 8.8 8~10 10mm Hexagon Sleeve
Fixing bolt of the front passenger airbag M8×1.25×16 8.8 11~13 10mm Hexagon Sleeve
Fixing screw component of the side air curtain — — 8~10 —
Side collision sensor retaining bolts M6×1.0×30 8 9~11 10mm Hexagon Sleeve
Fixing bolt of front buckle M10×1.25×20 8.8 40~50 17mm Hexagon Sleeve

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 229


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code


3.1 DTC fault code list
Fault Code Definition
B100049 ECU internal fault
B100155 ECU configuration error
B10024A Incorrect installation or initialization fault of driver peripheral sensor
B100264 Reliability fault of driver peripheral acceleration sensor
B100296 Driver peripheral acceleration sensor damaged
B100286 Communication fault of driver peripheral sensor
B10081C Driver peripheral acceleration sensor bonding
B100811 Driver peripheral acceleration sensor short to ground
B100812 Driver peripheral acceleration sensor short to power supply
B10034A Incorrect installation or initialization fault of passenger peripheral sensor
B100364 Reliability fault of passenger peripheral acceleration sensor
B100386 Communication fault of passenger peripheral sensor
B100396 Passenger peripheral acceleration sensor damaged
B10091C Passenger peripheral acceleration sensor bonding
B100911 Passenger peripheral acceleration sensor short to ground
B100912 Passenger peripheral acceleration sensor short to power supply
B10101C Driver airbag bonding
B101011 Driver airbag is short to ground.
B101012 Driver airbag short to power supply
B10101B Driver airbag resistance is too low
B10101A Driver airbag resistance is too low
B10111C Passenger airbag grounding
B101111 Passenger airbag is short to ground.
B101112 Passenger airbag is short to power supply
B10111B Passenger airbag resistance is too low
B10111A Passenger airbag resistance is too low
B10121C Driver seat belt pre-tensioner bonding
B101211 Driver's seat belt pretensioner is short to ground.
B101212 Driver's seat belt pretensioner is short to power supply
B10121B Driver's seat belt pretensioner resistance is too high

230 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Fault Code Definition


B10121A Driver's seat belt pretensioner resistance is too low.
B10131C Passenger seat belt pre-tensioner bonding
B101311 Passenger’s seat belt pretensioner is short to ground
B101312 Passenger seat belt pre-tensioner short to power supply
B10131B Passenger's seat belt pretensioner resistance is too high.
B10131A Passenger's seat belt pretensioner resistance is too low.
B10141C Driver side airbag bonding
B101411 Driver's side airbag is short to ground.
B101412 Driver's side airbag is short to power supply.
B10141B Driver's side airbag resistance is too high.
B10141A Driver's side airbag resistance is too low.
B10151C Passenger side airbag bonding
B101511 Passenger’s side airbag is short to ground.
B101512 Passenger’s side airbag is short to power supply.
B10151B Passenger’s side airbag resistance is too high.
B10151A Passenger’s side airbag resistance is too low.
B10161C Passenger air curtain bonding
B101611 Passenger air curtain short to ground
B101612 Passenger air curtain is short to power supply
B10161B Passenger air curtain resistance too high
B10161A Passenger air curtain resistance is too low
B10171C Driver air curtain bonding
B101711 Driver air curtain short to ground
B101712 Driver air curtain is short to power supply
B10171B Driver air curtain resistance too high
B10171A Driver air curtain resistance is too low
B10201C Driver seat belt buckle bonding
B102012 Driver seat belt buckle short to power supply
B10211C Passenger seat belt buckle bonding
B102112 Passenger seat belt buckle short to power supply
B102312 Passenger seat cushion buckle short to power supply
B103414 Output short to ground or resistance too high
B103412 Crash output short to power supply for more than 6ms
U300317 Too high voltage of power

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 231


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Fault Code Definition


U300316 Too low voltage of power
B105000 Exploded in frontal crash
B105100 Exploded in side crash
B105200 Crash counter maximizes
U010000 Loss of communication with EMS
U015500 Loss of communication with the instrument
U015100 Airbag offline
U100500 Airbag warning light error
U100400 Vehicle speed information invalid
U007300 CAN bus fault
U300316 Too low voltage of power

232 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3.2 B100049 ECU Internal Fault B100155 ECU Configuration Error U007300 CAN Bus Fault
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Important circuit parts will
be checked, including:
watchdog, ER capacity,
 Wire fault
B100049 ECU internal fault SPI, ADC, sensor, —
 Control unit fault
fireproof circuit, RAM,
ROM, voltage stabilizer,
etc.
 Wire fault
ECU
 External option
B100155 configuration  2ms after the fault —
configuration error
error
 Control unit fault
 The message
 The fault is reported when
cannot be sent
the controller fails to send  Wire fault
U007300 CAN bus fault in two
message and the error  Control unit fault
continuous bus
counter counts to 256
off status

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect the airbag controller connector T32b and check the connector T32b for crack and abnormality, and check the
pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 233


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T32b/2 and T32b/17 of the airbag controller connector and
pins T16j/11 and T16j/3 of the OBD diagnostic interface are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

3. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 4.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
4. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.3 B10024A Incorrect Installation or Initialization Fault of Driver Peripheral Sensor B100264
Reliability Fault of Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B100296 Driver Peripheral
Acceleration Sensor Damaged B100286 Communication Fault of Driver Peripheral Acceleration
Sensor B10081C Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Bonding B100811 Driver Peripheral
Acceleration Sensor Short to Ground B100812 Driver Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Short to
Power Supply
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
Incorrect installation or  Wire fault
B10024A initialization fault of  40ms after the fault —  Incorrect PAS type
driver peripheral sensor  Control unit fault
Reliability fault of  Wire fault
B100264 driver peripheral  1000ms after the fault —  PAS reliability fault
acceleration sensor  Control unit fault

234 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
Driver peripheral  Wire fault
 120ms after the
B100296 acceleration sensor —  PAS defectiveness
fault
damaged  Control unit fault
 Wire fault
Communication fault
 150ms after the  PAS communication
B100286 of driver peripheral —
fault error
sensor
 Control unit fault
 Driver side PAS line
connected to
Driver peripheral passenger side PAS
B10081C acceleration sensor  40ms after the fault — line
bonding  Driver side crash
sensor fault
 Control unit fault
 PAS line short to
Driver peripheral ground
B100811 acceleration sensor  40ms after the fault —  Driver side crash
short to ground sensor fault
 Control unit fault
 PAS line short to
Driver peripheral positive terminal
B100812 acceleration sensor  40ms after the fault —  Driver side crash
short to power supply sensor fault
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and driver side crash sensor connector T2f, check airbag controller
connector T32b and driver side crash sensor connector T2f for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and
rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 235


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T32b/18 and T32b/19 of the airbag controller connector
and pins T2f/1 and T2f/2 of the driver side crash sensor connector are
open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable.


4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

236 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short


to ground.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
7. Replace the driver side crash sensor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No-Replace the driver side crash sensor.
8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.4 B10034A Incorrect Installation or Initialization Fault of Passenger Peripheral Acceleration


Sensor B100364 Reliability Fault of Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B100386
Communication Fault of Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor B100396 Passenger Peripheral
Acceleration Sensor Damaged B10091C Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Bonding
B100911 Passenger Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Short to Ground B100912 Passenger
Peripheral Acceleration Sensor Short to Power Supply
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
Incorrect installation or
 Wire fault
initialization fault of
B10034A  40ms after the fault —  PAS type incorrect
passenger peripheral
 Control unit fault
sensor

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 237


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
Reliability fault of  Wire fault
 1000ms after the
B100364 passenger peripheral —  PAS credibility fault
fault
acceleration sensor  Control unit fault
 Wire fault
Communication fault
 150ms after the  PAS communication
B100386 of passenger peripheral —
fault error
sensor
 Control unit fault
Passenger peripheral  Wire fault
 120ms after the
B100396 acceleration sensor —  PAS defectiveness
fault
damaged  Control unit fault
 Passenger side PAS
Passenger peripheral line connected to
B10091C acceleration sensor  40ms after the fault — driver side PAS line
bonding  Sensor Fault
 Control unit fault
 PAS line short to
Passenger peripheral
ground
B100911 acceleration sensor  40ms after the fault —
 Sensor Fault
short to ground
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and right crash sensor connector T2k, check airbag controller connector
T32b and right crash sensor connector T2k for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

238 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T32b/27 and T32b/28 of the airbag controller connector
and pins T2k/1 and T2k/2 of the right crash sensor connector are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable.


4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 239


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short


to ground.
Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
7. Replace the right crash sensor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No-Replace the right crash sensor.
8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.5 B10101C Driver Airbag Bonding B101011 Driver Airbag Short to Ground B101012 Driver
Airbag Short to Power Supply B10101B Driver Airbag Resistance too High B10101A Driver
Airbag Resistance too Low
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Driver side airbag
circuit is connected
 Connected to other
to line of other
circuit in
B10101C Driver airbag bonding — ignition circuit
initialization for
 Driver Airbag
more than 6ms
Malfunction
 Control unit fault

240 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Airbag line short to
ground
Driver airbag is short  1500ms after the
B101011 —  Driver Airbag
to ground. fault
Malfunction
 Control unit fault
 Airbag line short to
positive terminal
Driver airbag short to  1500ms after the
B101012 —  Driver Airbag
power supply fault
Malfunction
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 1500ms after the
Driver airbag  Airbag resistance
B10101B resistance is higher —
resistance is too low too high
than 5.5Ω
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 1500ms after the
Driver airbag  Airbag resistance
B10101A resistance is lower —
resistance is too low too low
than 1.1Ω
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and driver airbag connector T2ae, check airbag controller connector T32b
and driver airbag connector T2ae for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T32b/3 and T32b/4 of the airbag controller connector and
pins T2ae/1 and T2ae/2 of the driver airbag connector are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 241


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect battery negative cable.


4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short


to ground.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
7. Replace the driver airbag, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No Replace driver airbag.
8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes, find out the reasons from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

242 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3.6 B10111C Passenger Airbag Bonding B101111 Passenger Airbag Short to Ground B101112
Passenger Airbag Short to Power Supply B10111B Passenger Airbag Resistance too High
B10111A Passenger Airbag Resistance too Low
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 The front passenger
side airbag line is
 Connected to other
connected to line of
Passenger airbag circuit in
B10111C — other circuit
grounding initialization for
 Passenger airbag
more than 6ms
fault
 Control unit fault
 Airbag line short to
ground
Passenger airbag is  1500ms after the
B101111 —  Passenger airbag
short to ground. fault
fault
 Control unit fault
 Airbag line short to
positive terminal
Passenger airbag is  1500ms after the
B101112 —  Passenger airbag
short to power supply fault
fault
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 1500ms after the
Passenger airbag  Airbag resistance
B10111B resistance is higher —
resistance is too low too high
than 5.5Ω
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 1500ms after the
Passenger airbag  Airbag resistance
B10111A resistance is lower —
resistance is too low too low
than 1.1Ω
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and passenger airbag connector T2av, check airbag controller connector
T32b and passenger airbag connector T2av for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 243


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T32b/5 and T32b/6 of the airbag controller connector and
pins T2av/1 and T2av/2 of the passenger airbag connector are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable.


4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

244 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short


to ground.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
7. Replace the passenger airbag, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No Replace the front passenger airbag.
8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.7 B10121C Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Bonding B101211 Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner
Short to Ground B101212 Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Short to Power Supply B10121B Driver
Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Resistance too High B10121A Driver Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Resistance
too Low
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 BT1FD circuit line
is connected to line
 Connected to other
Driver seat belt of other circuit
B10121C circuit in initialization —
pre-tensioner bonding  Driver seat belt
for more than 6ms
pre-tensioner fault
 Control unit fault

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 245


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Seat belt pre-tensioner
Driver's seat belt line short to ground
 1500ms after the
B101211 pretensioner is short to —  Driver seat belt
fault
ground. pre-tensioner fault
 Control unit fault
 Seat belt pre-tensioner
line short to positive
Driver's seat belt
 1500ms after the terminal
B101212 pretensioner is short to —
fault  Driver seat belt
power supply
pre-tensioner fault
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
Driver's seat belt  1500ms after the
 Seat belt pre-tensioner
B10121B pretensioner resistance resistance is higher —
resistance too high
is too high than 5.5Ω
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
Driver's seat belt  1500ms after the
 Seat belt pre-tensioner
B10121A pretensioner resistance resistance is lower —
resistance too low
is too low. than 1.1Ω
 Control unit fault
Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and driver seat belt pre-tensioner connector T2g, check airbag controller
connector T32b and driver seat belt pre-tensioner connector T2g for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion
and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T32b/7 and T32b/8 of the airbag controller connector and
pins T2g/1 and T2g/2 of the driver seat belt pre-tensioner connector are
open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

246 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect battery negative cable.


4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short


to ground.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
7. Replace the driver seat belt pre-tensioner, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No Replace driver seal belt pre-tensioner
8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 247


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3.8 B10131C Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Bonding B101311 Passenger Seat Belt
Pre-tensioner Short to Ground B101312 Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Short to Power Supply
B10131B Passenger Seat Belt Pre-tensioner Resistance too High B10131A Passenger Seat Belt
Pre-tensioner Resistance too Low
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Ignition circuit line
is connected to
 Connected to other other ignition circuit
Passenger seat belt
B10131C circuit in initialization — line
pre-tensioner bonding
for more than 6ms  Passenger's seat belt
pretensioner fault
 Control unit fault
 Seat belt
pre-tensioner line
Passenger’s seat belt
short to ground
B101311 pretensioner is short to  1500ms after the fault —
 Passenger's seat belt
ground
pretensioner fault
 Control unit fault
 Seat belt
pre-tensioner line
Passenger seat belt short to positive
B101312 pre-tensioner short to  1500ms after the fault — terminal
power supply  Passenger's seat belt
pretensioner fault
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
Passenger's seat belt  1500ms after the  Seat belt
B10131B pretensioner resistance resistance is higher — pre-tensioner
is too high. than 5.5Ω resistance too high
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
Passenger's seat belt  1500ms after the  Seat belt
B10131A pretensioner resistance resistance is lower than — pre-tensioner
is too low. 1.1Ω resistance too low
 Control unit fault
Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and front passenger seat belt pre-tensioner connector T2j, check airbag
controller connector T32b and front passenger seat belt pre-tensioner connector T2j for crack and abnormality and check the
pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

248 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T32b/10 and T32b/9 of the airbag controller connector and
pins T2j/1 and T2j/2 of the front passenger seat belt pre-tensioner
connector are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable.


4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 249


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short


to ground.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
7. Replace the front passenger seat belt pre-tensioner, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No-Replace the front passenger seat belt pre-tensioner.
8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.9 B10141C Driver Side Airbag Bonding B101411 Driver Side Airbag Short to Ground B101412
Driver Side Airbag Short to Power Supply B10141B Driver Side Airbag Resistance too High
B10141A Driver Side Airbag Resistance too Low
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Ignition circuit line
is connected to
 Connected to other other ignition circuit
Driver side airbag
B10141C circuit in initialization — line
bonding
for more than 6ms  Driver’s Side
Airbag Fault
 Control unit fault

250 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Airbag line short to
ground
Driver's side airbag is
B101411  1500ms after the fault —  Driver’s Side
short to ground.
Airbag Fault
 Control unit fault
 Airbag line short to
positive terminal
Driver's side airbag is
B101412  1500ms after the fault —  Driver’s Side
short to power supply.
Airbag Fault
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 1500ms after the
Driver's side airbag  Airbag resistance
B10141B resistance is higher —
resistance is too high. too high
than 5.5Ω
 Control unit fault
 1500ms after the  Wire fault
Driver's side airbag
B10141A resistance is lower than —  Airbag resistance
resistance is too low.
1.1Ω too low

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and driver side airbag connector T2d, check airbag controller connector
T32b and driver side airbag connector T2d for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T32b/11 and T32b/12 of the airbag controller connector
and pins T2d/1 and T2d/2 of the driver side airbag connector are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 251


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect battery negative cable.


4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short


to ground.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
7. Replace the driver side airbag, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No-Replace the driver side airbag.
8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

252 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3.10 B10151C Passenger Side Airbag Bonding B101511 Passenger Side Airbag Short to Ground
B101512 Passenger Side Airbag Short to Power Supply B10151B Passenger Side Airbag
Resistance too High B10151A Passenger Side Airbag Resistance too Low
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Ignition circuit line
is connected to
 Connected to other
Passenger side airbag other ignition circuit
B10151C circuit in initialization —
bonding  Passenger side
for more than 6ms
airbag fault
 Control unit fault
 Airbag line short to
ground
Passenger’s side airbag
B101511  1500ms after the fault —  Passenger side
is short to ground.
airbag fault
 Control unit fault
 Airbag line short to
Passenger’s side airbag positive terminal
B101512 is short to power  1500ms after the fault —  Passenger side
supply. airbag fault
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 1500ms after the
Passenger’s side airbag  Airbag resistance
B10151B resistance is higher —
resistance is too high. too high
than 5.5Ω
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 1500ms after the
Passenger’s side airbag  Airbag resistance
B10151A resistance is lower than —
resistance is too low. too low
1.1Ω
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and passenger side airbag connector T2a, check airbag controller connector
T32b and passenger side airbag connector T2a for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 253


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T32b/14 and T32b/13 of the airbag controller connector
and pins T2a/1 and T2a/2 of the passenger side airbag connector are
open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable.


4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

254 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short


to ground.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
7. Replace the passenger side airbag, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No-Replace the passenger side airbag.
8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.11 B10161C Passenger Air Curtain Bonding B101611 Passenger Air Curtain Short to Ground
B101612 Passenger Air Curtain Short to Power Supply B10161B Passenger Air Curtain
Resistance too High B10161A Passenger Air Curtain Resistance too Low
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Curtain airbag
circuit line is
 Connected to other connected to line of
Passenger air curtain
B10161C circuit in initialization — other circuit
bonding
for more than 6ms  Passenger air
curtain fault
 Control unit fault

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 255


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Airbag line short to
ground
Passenger air curtain
B101611  1500ms after the fault —  Passenger air
short to ground
curtain fault
 Control unit fault
 Airbag line short to
positive terminal
Passenger air curtain is
B101612  1500ms after the fault —  Passenger air
short to power supply
curtain fault
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 1500ms after the
Passenger air curtain  Airbag resistance
B10161B resistance is higher —
resistance too high too high
than 5.5Ω
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 1500ms after the
Passenger air curtain  Airbag resistance
B10161A resistance is lower than —
resistance is too low too low
1.1Ω
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and passenger air curtain connector T2n, check airbag controller connector
T32b and passenger air curtain connector T2n for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T32b/23 and T32b/24 of the airbag controller connector
and pins T2n/1 and T2n/2 of the passenger air curtain connector are
open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

256 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect battery negative cable.


4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short


to ground.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
7. Replace the passenger air curtain, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No-Replace the passenger air curtain.
8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 257


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3.12 B10171C Driver Air Curtain Bonding B101711 Driver Air Curtain Short to Ground B101712
Driver Air Curtain Short to Power Supply B10171B Driver Air Curtain Resistance too High
B10171A Driver Air Curtain Resistance too Low
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Driver side curtain
airbag circuit is
 Connected to other connected to line of
Driver air curtain
B10171C circuit in initialization — other circuit
bonding
for more than 6ms  Driver Air Curtain
Malfunction
 Control unit fault
 Airbag line short to
ground
Driver air curtain short
B101711  1500ms after the fault —  Driver Air Curtain
to ground
Malfunction
 Control unit fault
 Airbag line short to
positive terminal
Driver air curtain is
B101712  1500ms after the fault —  Driver Air Curtain
short to power supply
Malfunction
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 1500ms after the
Driver air curtain  Airbag resistance
B10171B resistance is higher —
resistance too high too high
than 5.5Ω
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 1500ms after the
Driver air curtain  Airbag resistance
B10171A resistance is lower than —
resistance is too low too low
1.1Ω
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and driver air curtain connector T2i, check airbag controller connector T32b
and driver air curtain connector T2i for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

258 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T32b/31 and T32b/32 of the airbag controller connector
and pins T2i/1 and T2i/2 of the driver air curtain connector are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable.


4. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 259


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short


to ground.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
7. Replace the driver air curtain, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No-Replace the driver air curtain.
8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.13 B10201C Driver Seat Belt Buckle Bonding B102012 Driver Seat Belt Buckle Short to Power
Supply
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Erroneous
connection
Driver seat belt buckle
B10201C  6ms after the fault —  Fault of driver seat
bonding
belt switch
 Control unit fault
 Erroneous
connection
Driver seat belt buckle
B102012  6ms after the fault —  Fault of driver seat
short to power supply
belt switch
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:

260 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and driver seat belt switch connector T2e, check airbag controller connector
T32b and driver seat belt switch connector T2e for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Disconnect battery negative cable.
3. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

4. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short


to ground.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 6.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
6. Replace the driver seat belt switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No-Replace the driver seat belt switch.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 261


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.14 B10211C Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Bonding B102112 Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Short to
Power Supply
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Erroneous
connection
Passenger seat belt  Fault of front
B10211C  6ms after the fault —
buckle bonding passenger seat belt
switch
 Control unit fault
 Erroneous
connection
Passenger seat belt
 Fault of front
B102112 buckle short to power  6ms after the fault —
passenger seat belt
supply
switch
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T24f, front passenger seat belt switch connector T2b and front passenger seat belt
sensor connector T2c, check airbag controller connector T24f, front passenger seat belt switch connector T2b and front
passenger seat belt sensor connector T2c for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Disconnect battery negative cable.
3. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

262 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short


to ground.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether the pin T2c/2 of the front passenger seat belt sensor
connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 263


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether pin T2b/1 and pin T2b/2 of the front passenger seat
belt switch connector are short.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

7. Check whether pin T2c/1 and pin T2c/2 of the front passenger seat
belt switch connector are short.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 8.

8. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 9.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
9. Replace the front passenger seat belt switch, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 10.
− No-Replace the front passenger seat belt switch.
10. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

264 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3.15 B103414 Crash Output Short to Ground or Open B103412 Output Short to Power Supply
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Wire fault
 Crash output short to
Crash output short to  Crash output short
B103414 power supply for more —
ground or open to ground
than 6ms
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 Crash output short to
Output short to power  Crash output short
B103412 power supply for more —
supply to positive terminal
than 6ms
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b, body controller connector T40b and engine control unit connector T112,
check airbag controller connector T32b, body controller connector T40b and engine control unit connector T112 for crack
and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Disconnect battery negative cable.
3. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 265


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short


to ground.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether the wire between pin T32b/26 of the airbag controller
connector and pin T40b/39 of the body controller connector is open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

266 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the wire between pin T32b/26 of the airbag controller
connector and pin T112/26 of the engine control unit connector is open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

7. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
8. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.16 U300317 power supply voltage is too high, and U300316 power supply voltage is too low.
DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Wire fault
 Battery Voltage is
Too high voltage of  Voltage is higher than Too High
U300317 —
power 16V for 1000ms  Charging
overvoltage
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 Lower battery
Too low voltage of  Voltage is lower than voltage
U300316 —
power 9V for 1000ms  Charging
undervoltage
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Check whether the battery charging circuit is normal, and whether the terminal is loose and corrodes.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire and tighten or clean the terminal.
− No Proceed to step 2.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 267


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Extract the fuse FB42 (10A) out of the instrument panel electrical box and check whether the fuse FB42 (10A) in the
instrument panel electrical box is blown.
− Yes-Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 3.
3. Check whether the battery voltage is within the normal range.
− Yes Proceed to Step 4.
− No, repair or replace battery.
4. Check whether the generator power voltage is within normal range.
− Yes Proceed to Step 5.
− No, repair or replace the generator.
5. Disconnect the airbag controller connector T32b and check the connector T32b for crack and abnormality, and check the
pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes, clean the connector and pins.
− No Proceed to step 6.
6. Disconnect battery negative cable.
7. Check whether pin 1 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short
to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 8.

268 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9. Check whether pin 16 of the airbag controller connector T32b is short


to ground.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 10.

10. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.17 B105000 Exploded in Frontal Crash B105100 Exploded in Side Crash


DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Wire fault
Exploded in frontal
B105000  After ignition —  Unfolded in crash
crash
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
B105100 Exploded in side crash  After ignition —  Unfolded in crash
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Check whether relevant airbag/air curtain is indeed exploded.
− Yes-Replace the damaged part.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 3.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
3. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 269


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.


− No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.18 B105200 Crash Counter Maximizes


DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Wire fault
Crash counter
B105200  After crash —  Unfolded in crash
maximizes
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 2.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
2. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

3.19 U010000 Loss of Communication with EMS U015500 Loss of Communication with
Instrument U100400 Vehicle Speed Information Invalid U100500 Airbag Warning Light Error
U015100 Airbag Offline
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Wire fault
 The minimum period
 SDM loses
Loss of communication message of the node is
U010000 — communication with
with EMS lost for 15 periods,
EMS
totaling 300ms.
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 The minimum period
 SDM loses
Loss of communication message of the node is
U015500 — communication with
with the instrument lost for 10 periods,
ICM
totaling 1000ms.
 Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 The invalid
 SDM loses
Vehicle speed vehicle speed
U100400 — communication with
information invalid received is
other nodes
over 300ms
 Control unit fault

270 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

DTC trigger
DTC DTC Definition DTC testing conditions Possible causes
conditions
 The airbag receives the  Wire fault
Airbag warning light message ―Warning  Warning light is
U100500 —
error Lamp Fault‖ from the faulty
instrument  Control unit fault
 Wire fault
 No response to the  SDM
U015100 Airbag offline message sent by airbag — communication
to bus error
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect airbag controller connector T32b and instrument cluster connector T32a, check airbag controller connector
T32b and instrument cluster connector T32a for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Disconnect body controller connector T40b, check the body controller connector T40b for crack and abnormality and
check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 3.
3. Disconnect engine control unit connector T112 and body controller connector T24, check engine control unit connector
T112 and body controller connector T24 for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 4.

4. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T32b/2 and T32b/17 of the airbag controller connector and
pins T32a/16 and T32a/15 of the instrument cluster connector are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 271


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether the wire between pin T32b/26 of the airbag controller
connector and pin T40b/39 of the body controller connector is open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether the wire between pin T32b/26 of the airbag controller
connector and pin T112/26 of the engine control unit connector is open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

272 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T32b/2 and T32b/17 of the airbag controller connector and
pins T16j/11 and T16j/3 of the OBD diagnostic interface are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 8.

8. Check whether power supply and grounding of the airbag controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 9.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
9. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 10.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.
10. Replace the instrument cluster, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No - Replace the instrument cluster.
11. Replace the BCM and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and its
symptoms remain.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 12.
− No-Replace the body controller.
12. Replace the engine control unit, diagnose again, read the DTCs, and confirm whether the DTCs and symptom exist.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the engine control unit.

4 Seat Belt
4.1 Brief introduction
4.1.1 Pay attention to safety regulations of the seat belt retractor

Danger

If collision occurred, causing the seat belt retractor to work, the seat belt assembly must be replaced.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 273


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

 All the inspection, assembly and repair work are only allowed by trained technicians.
 Do not open or repair the seat belt retractor (or else there is a risk of injury).
 Do not re-install the seat belt retractor that has got violent collision or fallen on the ground.
 Replace the seat belt retractor which has mechanical damage (pits or cracks).
 Install the seat belt retractor immediately after it has been taken out from the transport container.
 Do not use the compressed-air impact wrench to remove or install the seat belt retractor.
 Do not place he seat belt retractor randomly.
 Do not handle the seat belt retractor with grease, cleaning agent or similar items.Do not leave the seat belt retractor in
places with a temperature above 100 ℃.

4.1.2 Disposal of seat belt retractor


 Recycle the un-triggered seat belt retractor in the form of the original packaging according to laws and regulations of
the state.For any questions, please consult the sales center or the manufacturer.
 Dispose of the triggered airbag retractor according to the waste regulations of the enterprise.

274 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.2 Overview of seat belt

1 - Rear central seat belt 2 - Left rear seat belt assembly


 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 281  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 280
3 - Height adjuster of the left front seat belt 4 - Driver side seat belt buckle
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 279  Check, replace if necessary
5 - Right front seat belt assembly 6 - Rear double buckle assembly
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 276  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 284
7 - Rear single buckle assembly
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 284

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 275


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.3 Removal and installation of the front seat belt assembly


Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the front left seat belt assembly, but may serve as a reference for
the right side.

Note

 Pay attention to safety regulations of the seat belt retractor.


 Static electricity discharge may cause the belt retractor to trigger accidentally. Therefore, static electricity must be
discharged before repairing the system, touch the vehicle body for a short while to discharge the static electricity.

1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.


2. Remove B-pillar lower trim panel => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment: trim panel
and trim part; Removal and installation of the B-pillar lower trim panel.
3. Press the left front height adjuster switch -1- along the direction of
the -Arrow- and pry the left front height adjuster switch cover -2-.

4. Unscrew the upper fixing bolt -Arrow-of the front seat belt and
remove the upper fixing point of the front seat belt -1- from the left
height adjuster.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M10×1.25×20
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

276 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the seat belt guide ring and
remove the seat belt guide ring-1-.
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 7 - 9 Nm

6. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow A- of front seat belt retractor and
remove the seat belt retractor-1-.
7. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow B- of the front seat belt
retractor and remove the front seat belt assembly -1-.
Bolt - Arrow A - Specifications:M10×1.25×20
Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm
Bolt -Arrow A- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check locking function of the left front seat belt assembly after installation.

4.4 Removal and installation of front seat belt buckle assembly


Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the driver side seat belt buckle assembly, but may serve as a
reference for the front passenger side.
1. Remove front seat => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 89; Seat; Removal and installation of front seat
belt buckle assembly: Removal and installation of front manual seat assembly.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 277


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Unscrew the fixing bolt of the driver side seat belt buckle assembly
-Arrow-.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M10×1.25×20
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

Tips
 As sealant is applied on the bolt, it should be replaced every time it
is loosened.
 Clean the threads of corresponding nuts before installing new
bolts.
3. Remove driver side seat belt buckle assembly -1- from the seat.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

278 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.5 Removal and installation of the height adjuster


Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for removal and installation of the left height adjuster, but may serve as a reference for removal and
installation of the right height adjuster.

1. Remove B-pillar upper trim panel=> Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment: trim panel
and trim part; Removal and installation of the B-pillar upper trim panel.
2. Unscrew the fixing bolt component-Arrow- of the left height adjuster
and remove the left height adjuster-1-.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M10×1.25×20
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check functions of the left height adjuster after installation.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 279


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.6 Removal and installation of the rear seat belt assembly

Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for removal and installation of the left rear seat belt assembly, but may serve as a reference for
removal and installation of the right rear seat belt assembly.

Note

Pay attention to safety regulations of the seat belt retractor.


1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Remove left wheel cover trim panel assembly => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment;
Trim part and trim panel: Remove wheel cover trim panel assembly.
3. Pry the left rear seat belt baffle -1- along the direction of the -Arrow-.

4. Remove cover plate of the seat belt upper fixing point -1-.
5. Unscrew the upper fixing bolt component -Arrow- of the left rear seat
belt and remove the upper fixing point -1- of the left rear seat belt.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M10×1.25×80
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

280 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. Unscrew the fixing bolt component-Arrow- of the left rear seat belt
retractor and remove the left rear seat belt assembly -1-.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M10×1.25×20
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check locking function of the left rear seat belt assembly after installation.

4.7 Removal and installation of the rear central seat belt assembly

Removal
1. Turn upward rear seat cushion assembly -1- at the position of
-Arrow-A along the direction of -Arrow-B.

2. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow- and remove the lower fixing point
-1- of the rear central seat belt.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M10×1.25×30
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 281


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow of the seat belt guide part and
remove the guide part from the seat belt.
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 3 - 5 Nm

4. Press down the unlocking button -1- and lay down the rear seat
backrest assembly.

5. Disengage the cable -Arrow- under the cover of the rear seat double
backrest as well as left and right cables -1- and -2-. (Applicable to split
backrest vehicle model only)

6. Remove C-ring -Arrow- at the bottom of the rear seat backrest cover
and disengage rear seat double backrest cover -1-. (Applicable to
integrated backrest vehicle model only)

Tips
 Replace the C-ring.

282 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. Disengage rear backrest cover and underframe.


8. Remove the fixing bolt -Arrow- of rear central seat belt tightener and
remove the rear central seat belt assembly -1-.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M10×1.25×20
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 16mm hexagon sleeve

Tips
During installation, apply the thread glue on the bolts.

Assembling
Assemble in reverse order of disassembly procedures and please note the following:
 Replace the relevant damaged parts.
 Check whether functions of the rear seat double backrest assembly are normal after assembly.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 283


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.8 Removal and installation of the rear double buckle assembly


Removal
1. Remove rear seat cushion assembly => Vehicle body and painting: Repair Group 89: Seat: Removal and installation
of rear seat cushion assembly.
2. Unscrew the fixing bolt component -Arrow- of the rear double buckle
assembly and remove the rear double buckle assembly -1-.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M10×1.25×30
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check connection function between seat belt buckle and tongue after installation.

4.9 Removal and installation of the rear single buckle assembly


Removal
1. Removal of the rear seat cushion=>Body and paint;Repair group:89; Seat;Rear seat;Removal and installation of the
rear seat cushion.
2. Unscrew fixing bolt component -Arrow- of the rear single buckle
assembly and remove the rear single buckle assembly -1-.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M10×1.25×30
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 40 - 50 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 17mm hexagon sleeve

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Check connection function between seat belt buckle and tongue after installation.

284 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.10 Seat belt: Check

Note

Check the seat belt, if traffic accident occurred to the vehicle.Determine whether the seat belt needs replacement
according to the damage extent confirmed by the inspection items.Explain to the customer the necessity to replace the
seat belt.

Inspection items:
1. Inspection of seat belt appearance
2. Inspection of seat belt retractor (locking function)
3. Visual inspection of seat belt buckle
4. Inspection of functions of seat belt buckle
5. Inspection of guide buckle and tongue
6. Inspection of fixtures and fixing points

4.10.1 Inspection of seat belt appearance


Pull out the seat belt from the seat belt retractor device completely.
Check whether the seat belt is dirty, and wash it with neutral soap if necessary.

Danger

 If one of the two damages is detected (1 and 2) as below in the accident vehicle, then replace the seat belt together
with the seat belt buckle and the seat belt height adjuster.
 If the one of the damages described in 1, 2, 3 and 4 is detected in the non-accident vehicle, then only replace the
damaged seat belt.

1. Seat belt broken, torn or scratched.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 285


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Torn fabric at the edge of the safety belts.

3. Burn marks, such as cigarette burns.

4. Distortion on one side, or wave-like edge of the safety belts.

4.10.2 Function test of seat belt retractor (locking function)


The seat belt retractor device has a double locking function.
The first locking function: triggered when the seat belt is pulled out quickly from the seat belt retractor device (pull
quickly).
Inspection
Pull out the seat belt quickly from the seat belt retractor.If the seat belt is not equipped with locking function, then replace
the seat belt and seat belt buckle as a whole.
The second locking function: triggered by the process of moving vehicle is changed (locking function related to
vehicle).

286 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Note

For safety considerations, driving tests must be performed on the road lane without other cars, so as to avoid risks for
other cars or pedestrians.

Inspection
1. Fasten the seat belt.
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 20km/h and apply the service brake.If the seat belt is not locked during the process of braking,
then replace the seat belt and seat belt buckle as a whole.

4.10.3 Visual inspection of seat belt buckle


Check the seat belt buckle for crack.
 If any, replace the seat belt and the seat belt buckle.

4.10.4 Function test of seat belt buckle


Locking test:
Push the seat belt tongue into the buckle until a click sound is heard. Pull the seat belt with force to check whether the
locking mechanism is normal.
 Repeat the test for at least 5 times, and replace the seat belt and the seat belt buckle, even if the tongue was not
snapped into the buckle just once.
Unlocking test:
 Press the button on the seat belt buckle with fingers and the seat belt tongue will eject automatically from the buckle.
 Repeat the test for at least 5 times, and replace the seat belt and the seat belt buckle as a whole, even if the tongue was
not ejected from the buckle just once.

Note

Never use grease on the button of seat belt buckle to eliminate noise or stiffness when operating the seat belt.

4.10.5 Check of fixture and fixing point


Replace the seat belt and the seat belt buckle if the following conditions occur to the fixtures and the fixing points.
1. Fastening piece was deformed (stretched).
2. The height regulator doesn't work.
3. Fixing points (seats, columns and chassis) are twisted or the screw threads damaged.

Tips
If the damaged is not caused by road accident but by wear and tear, then replace only the corresponding damaged parts.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 287


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5 Side Airbag
5.1 System overview
ECU check:
ECU checks preparation of the protection device module when it is powered on and exerts continuous monitoring once
started. ECU is able to check short circuit and open circuit inside the system, together with short circuit/electric leakage and
open circuit of the battery. ECU monitors status of following modules:
 ECU internal accelerometer
 ECU internal safety sensor
 ECU microprocessor
 Side crash sensor (if installed)
 Driver airbag
 Front passenger airbag
 Side airbag (if installed)
 Side air curtain (if installed)
 Pre-tensioner seat belt retractor
ECU tests current of airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner actuating device and checks continuity of circuits. When it monitors
any fault of the system or the part, warning light lights up to warn the driver. The airbag controller is connected with the
body control module and the vehicle diagnostic connector through CAN bus.

5.1.1 Observe the security precautions for airbag operation.

Danger

The explosive filler of airbag contains toxic substances. If not handled properly, it can be dangerous!
 All the inspection, removal, installation and repair work are only allowed by trained technicians.
 Test the airbag with the provided detection and measurement device, or there is a risk that the airbag might trigger.
 Only adopt the operational method described in this repair manual. Disassembly of the airbag is particularly
prohibited.
 The defective parts and accessories must be replaced with new original ones.
 Disconnect the battery negative cable before the airbag system starts to work. Wait for 1min after disconnection of the
battery negative cable. When the airbag system is connected to the power supply, no one should stay in the vehicle.
 Technicians should discharge static electricity before extracting (touching) the airbag. Touch some grounded metal
parts, such as water pipes, heating pipes or metal brackets to discharge static electricity.
 Install the airbag immediately after it is removed from the container. Put the airbag back in the container if the repair
work is interrupted.
 Do not place the airbag randomly.
 The removed airbag should be stored with the impact absorbing device side up.
 If the airbag has fallen onto the hard floor, or damaged, it cannot be used.
 Storage and transportation should follow the laws and regulations on explosive and dangerous materials.
 Vehicles equipped with side airbags are prohibited to use common seat covers, because this will affect the function of
side airbags.
 Replace all the fixing clips with new original ones.

288 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

 If the seat cover is damaged within the working range of side airbags, such as cracks, burn marks or holes, for safety
reasons, replace the seat covers with original accessories. 为安全起见,必须更换新的原装配件更换座椅套。

5.12 Disposal of the airbag controller


 A faulty airbag which have not been triggered must be disposed of by a specialized company in accordance with the
environmental protection law. To do this, use the specified transportation materials.
 Dispose of the triggered airbag according to the waste regulations of the enterprise.

5.2 Overview of airbag

1- Front passenger airbag 2- Airbag controller


 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 294  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 290
3 - Clock spring 4 - Side crash sensor
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 293  Total: 2 (one on each side)
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 298
5- Side airbag (passenger)- 6 - Side air curtain (if any)
 Total: 2 (one on each side)  Total: 2 (one on each side)
Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 295  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 296

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 289


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7 - Driver airbag 8 - Front passenger seat occupancy sensor


Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 291 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 299

5.3 Removal and installation of airbag controller


Removal

Note

Observe the security precautions for airbag operation.

Tips
The airbag controller is the control mechanism of the airbag system. It is installed in front of the gearshift and under the air
conditioning case. Its installation direction has a requirement: the arrow on the airbag controller housing must be installed
upwards and towards the front of the vehicle.
1. Unscrew and take out the retaining buckle -Arrow A- and pry the
auxiliary instrument panel left front cover -1- and right front cover -2-
along the direction of -Arrow B-.

2. Unscrew the fixing nut of the airbag controller -Arrow- and remove
the airbag controller 1.
Nut - Arrow- specification:M6×1.0
Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 8 - 10 Nm
Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 10mm hexagon sleeve

290 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Turn over locking mechanism of airbag controller the connecting plug


along the direction of -Arrow B-, disengage connector -A- of the airbag
controller -1- and remove the airbag controller.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Set the ignition ON (not necessarily to start the engine) after replacement of the airbag controller and configure the airbag
controller according to hints of the diagnostic tester.
Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

5.4 Driver airbag


5.4.1 Brief introduction
The driver airbag is installed at the center of the steering wheel. If a collision which exceeds a set limit occurs in the front,
the airbag will ignite to protect the driver.
The materials of the main airbag trim cover ensure that the driver airbag will tear off along the line and the airbag body can
deploy promptly when the airbag is ignited.

5.4.2 Removal and installation of the driver airbag


Removal

Tips
The length of the screwdriver used in the following operation should be about 155mm, with the width of cutter head of 4mm.

Note

 Observe the safety measures for airbag operation.


 Static electricity discharge may cause the airbag to trigger accidentally.Therefore, discharge the static electricity by
touching the vehicle body for a short while before repairing the system.
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 291


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Press the unlocking device -Arrow- and remove the driver airbag -1-
with tools.

3. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the driver airbag and


remove the driver airbag -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
The click sound of the connector must be heard when it is inserted.

5.5 Clock spring


5.5.1 Brief introduction
The clock spring is used for connecting driver airbag and airbag connecting harness. It is installed under the steering wheel
of the vehicle. It mainly consists of flexible flat cable, housing that performs relative rotation, wiring harness (conductive
lead) and connectors, etc. It is a kind of circuit connection that ensures the normal operation of electrical components (driver
airbag and speaker switch, etc.) when the steering wheel is turning left or right. The driver airbag will rotate with the
steering wheel (Imagine a harness with certain length intertwined on the steering wheel shaft.As the steering wheel is
rotating, the harness might loosen reversely or get even tighter.Its limitation ensures that the harness will not break when the
steering wheel rotates to the extreme left or right).Therefore, certain space should be left for the connecting harness to
ensure that it will not be snapped when the steering wheel rotates to one end. This is especially important when
installing.Try to keep the clock spring spindle in the middle position.

292 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5.5.2 Removal and installation of clock spring

Removal

Tips
Make the wheels in linear running status before removal of the clock spring.

1. Remove steering wheel assembly => Chassis; Repair Group: 45; Steering system; Removal and installation of the
steering wheel assembly.
2. Remove steering column upper guard -1- from the steering column
lower guard -2-.
3. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and remove the steering column lower
guard-2-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 1.3 - 1.9 Nm

4. Disengage the connecting plug –Arrow A, arrow B of the clock


springs

5. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and remove the clock spring


component-1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 4 - 6 Nm

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 293


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
1. The yellow marks must locate in the visible window -Arrow- and the
arrow marks -1- and -2- must align.

5.6 Front passenger airbag


5.6.1 Brief introduction
Front passenger airbag: installed under the cover marked with SRS/AIR BAG and above the glove box on the right side of
the instrument panel. If a collision which exceeds a set limit occurs in the front, the airbag will ignite to protect the front
passenger. The materials of the airbag trim cover ensure that the airbag will tear off along the line and the airbag body can
deploy promptly when the airbag is ignited.
Front passenger airbag is used for reducing the injuries to head or chest of the passenger caused by a second collision with
the interior trims. Once the auxiliary airbag is triggered, it can effectively protect the front passenger's head and chest.
As the "front passenger side occupancy sensor" is also equipped on the front passenger side seat, when the control unit
detects that the front passenger seat is without load, the front passenger side airbag will not ignite in vehicle collisions.

5.6.2 Removal and installation of the front passenger airbag


Removal

Note

 Observe the safety measures for airbag operation.


 Static electricity discharge may cause the airbag to trigger accidentally.Therefore, discharge the static electricity by
touching the vehicle body for a short while before repairing the system.
1. Remove instrument panel component => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 82; Instrument panel; Removal
and installation of the instrument panel component

294 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Disengage fixing clip -Arrow- of the front passenger airbag and


remove the front passenger airbag -1- from the fixing slot.
The front passenger airbag cannot have compressional deformation in
the process of removal.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.
The front passenger airbag cannot have compressional deformation in the process of installation.

5.7 Side airbag


5.7.1 Brief introduction

Front seat side airbag is installed on the outside of the seat bracket under the covering.When side collision occurs, the airbag
can protect the ribs, pelvis and upper internal organs.
When side collision occurs, if the side crash sensor detects that the collision degree exceeds a preset limit, a control signal is
transferred from the airbag controller to trigger the front seat side airbag.
Whether the front seat side airbag triggers does not depend on the speed of vehicle, but the the side crash objects, the
collision direction and the acceleration change of the vehicle. Therefore, some slight collision may cause injuries because
the front seat side airbag are not deployed. On the contrary, some relatively small structural damage can cause the
deployment of the front seat side airbag.

5.7.2 Removal and installation of side airbag

The side airbag is integrated in the front seat that forms an inseparable integral with the front seat.

5.8 Side air curtain


5.8.1 Brief introduction

Side air curtains are installed on the left and right sides of the vehicle roof.When the side impact exceeds a set limit, the air
curtain can protect the occupants. In one side impact, the air curtain on only one side will be triggered.
Side air curtains can ensure that when a collision occurs, the occupant's head will not crash on the vehicle body directly and
prevent the occupants from get injuries by foreign objects.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 295


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5.8.2 Removal and installation of the side air curtain


Removal

Tips

The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left side air curtain, but may serve as a reference for the right
side.

Note

 Observe the safety measures for airbag operation.


 Static electricity discharge may cause the airbag to trigger accidentally.Therefore, discharge the static electricity by
touching the vehicle body for a short while before repairing the system.
1. Remove interior top=> Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment; Trim part and trim panel:
Removal and installation of the interior top.

2. Unscrew the fixing screw component -Arrow- of the left armrest


mounting bracket and remove the left armrest mounting bracket -1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 8 - 10 Nm

296 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Disengage the connecting plug on the left side air curtain -Arrow-A.
4. Unscrew the fixing screw component -Arrow B- of the left side air curtain and remove the left side air curtain-1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 8 - 10 Nm
Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

5.9 Crash sensor


5.9.1 Brief introduction
The crash sensors are used to check crash deceleration and crash strength. When the airbag controller receives relevant
parameters, it decides to send the airbag explosion command or not by its internal calculation.
The crash sensor is an important component of the airbag system that functions to detect and determine the crash signal after
a crash occurred.
There are three types of crash sensors:
 Mechanical sensor: used mostly in early airbag systems, the mechanical sensor mainly applies the principle of inertia,
and the gas generator is triggered by inertial force of components in the sensor to overcome the spring force. As the
mechanical sensor will not activate the airbag at a low acceleration, it is highly reliable.However, it can only detect
with single points, so the quality, precision and wear resistance of mechanical parts must be of high quality.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 297


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

 Electronic sensor: the electronic sensor is the earliest crash sensor ever used. Based on electronic principles, it uses
electrical signals to reflect body deceleration, and then determines to explode the airbag or not according to the
electrical signals.
 The electromechanical sensor integrates both mechanical and electrical methods, and converts mechanical signals into
electrical signals which are used to ignite the airbag. It not only possesses the advantages of the mechanical sensor, but
also avoids its defects.

5.9.2 Removal and installation of side crash sensor

Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left side crash sensor, but may serve as a reference for the
right side.

Note

 Observe the safety measures for airbag operation.


 Static electricity discharge may cause the airbag to trigger accidentally.Therefore, discharge the static electricity by
touching the vehicle body for a short while before repairing the system.
1. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
2. Remove B-pillar lower trim panel => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 84; Interior equipment: trim panel
and trim part; Removal and installation of the B-pillar lower trim panel.
3. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow- of the left side crash sensor and
remove the left side crash sensor -1-.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M6×1.0×30
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 11 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the left side crash sensor
and remove the left side crash sensor -1-.

298 Repair Group 72 - Protection System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

5.10 Removal and installation of the front passenger seat occupancy sensor
The front passenger seat occupancy sensor is integrated in the front seat that forms an inseparable integral with the front
seat.

Repair Group 72 - Protection System 299


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

73 Air Conditioning System


1 Brief introduction
1.1 Repair instructions for vehicle air conditioning system
 When repairing the air conditioning system, disconnect the negative terminal of the battery and the ambient
environment and tools should be clean.
 Recover the refrigerant with special equipment before repairing the refrigerant circulation system.
 Take necessary actions for personal safety protection when carrying out relevant maintenance on the refrigerant, and
avoid touching or inhaling the refrigerant.
 Overhaul of the air conditioning pipes must be conducted in a well-ventilated environment.Do not weld the air
conditioning system which contains refrigerant.
 It is prohibited to discharge refrigerant directly into the atmosphere.Special equipment may be used for recovering
refrigerant.Waste refrigerant should be disposed of according to relevant regulations.
 A container with refrigerant should be stored in a cool place.Do not place it in sunlight or at a high temperature to
prevent it from expanding and bursting.
 Use the original O-rings.Apply a small amount of refrigerant oil when installing the sealing rings.
 Use special maintenance equipment for the R-134a refrigerant.
 Vacuum the system before filling the refrigerant.
 Refrigerant and refrigerant oil should be stored as required.Avoid mixing with water or other impurities from the
air.Refrigerant oil that has not been stored in a sealed container or expired refrigerant cannot be used.

1.2 Instructions for R-134a Refrigerant


 Modern automobiles generally use R-134a refrigerant in the air conditioning system. With a standard evaporation
temperature of -26.5 ℃ , R-134a refrigerant has the following features: high safety, colorless,odorless, and
incombustible; low toxicity and chemical stability;
 large latent heat and heat capacity, good refrigeration capacity; good thermal conductivity; low viscosity, good
mobility; no damage to the ozone layer;
 small metal corrosion, high stability, insoluble in water; low freezing point, suitable for low temperature operation;
easy to detect for leakage.
 Please use the vehicle air conditioning refrigerant properly.Take protective measures to avoid any personal injury.
 As the refrigerant does not contain oxygen and its density is high, once released in a limited space, it will fill up the
narrow space and squeeze out the oxygen, leading to local oxygen deprivation.
 The refrigerant is not combustible or explosive, but once contacted with open flame, it may decompose harmful gases
(phosgene).
 As the refrigerant evaporates very quickly in atmospheric environment, if the liquid is stick to the skin, it will absorb a
lot of heat to evaporate, causing local frostbite.
 The storage container for refrigerant should reserve space for expansion.

1.3 Instructions for refrigerant oil


As a special lubricant for air-conditioning compressor, refrigerant oil ensures the normal and reliable operation of the
compressor and extends its lifespan. It provides functions as lubrication, sealing, cooling and noise reduction in the
compressor for the air conditioning refrigeration system.
Precautions for refrigerant oil:
 Use the refrigerant oil of the same type for the original air-conditioning system.Never use different types or brands of
refrigerant oil.
 As the moisture adsorption capacity of the refrigerant oil is extremely strong, when filling or replacing, the operations
must be conducted rapidly.Cover and seal the container of refrigerant oil immediately after filling to avoid leakage.
 Do not use expired refrigerant oil.
 Fill the refrigerant oil in accordance with the specified quantity, as excessive filling may reduce the cooling effect.
 Recover the refrigerant slowly, so the refrigerant oil will not be discharged together with the refrigerant.

300 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1.4 Description of air conditioning system


The air conditioning system is a device for refrigeration, heating, dehumidification and ventilation of the air inside the
vehicle. It can provide a comfortable environment for occupants, reduce driver fatigue, and improve traffic safety.
With the heat transmission effect, the air conditioning system transmits the heat in the air to a low temperature area.When
the evaporator is at a low temperature, it will absorb heat from the outside.With the refrigerant as a medium being pumped
into the compressor, its temperature will rise after compression and is much higher than the ambient temperature.As the
refrigerant at a high temperature flows into the condenser, the electronic fan will emit heat to the outside to reduce the
temperature.Due to the expansion throttling effect, the refrigerant at a low temperature flows into the evaporator and the
working cycle continues to absorb heat inside the vehicle, so as to achieve cooling effect.
The air conditioning system consists of compressor, condenser, evaporator, expansion valve, receiver-drier, pipe, condenser
fan, blower motor and control unit.
The air conditioning refrigerant circulation pipeline system is divided into the high-pressure and the low-pressure pipeline.
Refrigeration principle of air conditioning:

Cold air
High pressure side Low pressure side

High-pressure gas

High-pressure liquid
Evaporator Interior hot air
Low-pressure liquid

Low-pressure gas

Compressor
Blower

Expansion valve

Condenser

Exterior air

Receiver-drier

1. For the refrigeration of the air conditioning system, the gaseous refrigerant of low temperature and low pressure is
absorbed by the compressor from the evaporator.After compression, the temperature and pressure of refrigerant will
rise and it is sent to the condenser. In the condenser, gaseous refrigerant of high temperature and high pressure radiates
heat through the condenser, then it is changed into liquid refrigerant with high temperature and high pressure.
2. Liquid refrigerant flows into the receiver-drier, which is used to store and filter.
3. The filtered liquid refrigerant of high temperature and high pressure flows through the expansion valve, and transfers
to a gas/liquid mixture of low temperature and low pressure.It is then sent into the evaporator.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 301


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. In the evaporator, air is pumped into the evaporator surface by the blower.The air exchanges heat with aerosol
refrigerant of low temperature and low pressure through the evaporator fins. After absorbing the air heat in the vehicle,
the aerosol refrigerant of low temperature and low pressure is evaporated into gaseous refrigerant of low temperature
and low pressure.It is sent to the compressor low pressure end via pipeline for the next cycle.
5. The cold air after the heat exchange process is sent into the vehicle by the blower to reduce internal temperature.
Heating of air conditioning system:
 The heating function of air conditioning is provided by the excess heat from the engine coolant. After the engine is
warm, turn on the heater switch on the air-conditioning control panel, and then the coolant in the engine is
continuously circulating in the heating core body of the air conditioning. The wind from the blower motor passes the
heating core body and then hot air keeps flowing into the interior of the vehicle.
Ventilation of air conditioning system:
 The ventilation of air conditioning is to introduce fresh air from the outside while the vehicle is running, and to
discharge the dirty car air from the inside, so as to keep the air fresh within the vehicle, and also to prevent the window
glass from fog.
Dehumidification of air conditioning:
 In rainy days or when the temperature between inside and outside of the vehicle differs too much, the window glass is
easy to become foggy.The dehumidification of air conditioning can clear the fog on the window.

2 Check and Diagnosis


2.1 Air conditioning system pressure too high
No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Adjust the amount of
Check whether the
Proceed to Step 1. Refrigerant excessive refrigerant to the
refrigerant is excessive
nominal value
Check the radiator fin of
1 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
condenser
Check whether the radiator Radiator fin of Clean or replace the
Proceed to Step 2.
fin of condenser is blocked condenser blocked condenser
2 Check the electronic fan Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check the electronic
Check whether the
Proceed to Step 3. Electronic fan damaged fan and replace the
electronic fan is damaged
assembly if necessary
3 Check the expansion valve Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the
Expansion valve Replace the expansion
expansion valve is blocked Proceed to Step 4.
blocked or defective valve
or defective
4 Check the compressor Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Replace the air
Check whether the
Proceed to Step 5. Compressor damaged conditioning
compressor is damaged
compressor
5 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

302 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2.2 Air conditioning system pressure too low


No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether any air
Air conditioning Replace the air
conditioning pipeline is Proceed to Step 1.
pipeline leaky conditioning pipeline
leaky
1 Check the refrigerant Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Adjust the amount of
Check whether the
Proceed to Step 2. Refrigerant insufficient refrigerant to the
refrigerant is insufficient
standard value
2 Check the expansion valve Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the
Expansion valve Replace the expansion
expansion valve is blocked Proceed to Step 3.
blocked or defective valve
or defective
3 Check the compressor Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Replace the air
Check whether the
Proceed to Step 4. Compressor damaged conditioning
compressor is damaged
compressor
4 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

2.3 Air conditioning cannot refrigerate


No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the Adjust the amount of
Refrigerant insufficient
refrigerant is insufficient Proceed to Step 1. refrigerant to the
or excessive
or excessive standard value
Check the pressure of
1 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
refrigeration system
Check whether the Check the pipeline for
Refrigeration system
pressure of refrigeration Proceed to Step 2. leakage, and fill the
pressure insufficient
system is insufficient refrigerant if necessary
Check the air conditioning
2 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
relay
Check whether the air
Air conditioning relay Replace the air
conditioning relay is Proceed to Step 3.
damaged conditioning relay
damaged
3 Check the fuse Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the fuse is
Proceed to Step 4. Fuse blown Replace the fuse
blown
Check the evaporator
4 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
temperature sensor
Check whether the
Evaporator temperature Replace the evaporator
evaporator temperature Proceed to Step 5.
sensor defective temperature sensor
sensor is defective
Check the air conditioning
5 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
controller
Check whether air
Air conditioning Replace the air
conditioning controller is Proceed to Step 6.
controller damaged conditioning controller
damaged

Repair Group 73- A/C System 303


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

No. Inspection steps Check results


6 Check the expansion valve Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the
Expansion valve Replace the expansion
expansion valve is blocked Proceed to Step 7.
blocked or defective valve
or defective
Check the air conditioning
7 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
compressor
Replace the air
Check whether the
Proceed to Step 8. Compressor damaged conditioning
compressor is damaged
compressor
8 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

2.4 Compressor abnormal sound


No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the air Air conditioning
conditioning compressor compressor Adjust the tension of
Proceed to Step 1.
multi-wedge belt is multi-wedge belt multi-wedge belt
slipping slipping
Check the multi-wedge
1 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
belt
Check whether the Replace the
Proceed to Step 2. Multi-wedge belt aging
multi-wedge belt is aging multi-wedge belt
Check the compressor
2 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
component
Check whether the
Compressor component
compressor component is Proceed to Step 3. Tighten the component
loose
loose
Check the compressor
3 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
bearing
Check whether the
Compressor bearing
compressor bearing is Proceed to Step 4. Replace the compressor
damaged
damaged
4 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

2.5 Cooling air not continuous


No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Vacuum the air
Check whether water leaks Water leaks in the
conditioning system
in the refrigerant Proceed to Step 1. refrigerant circulation
and replace the
circulation circuit circuit
receiver-drier
Check the air conditioning
1 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
pressure sensor
Check whether the air Air conditioning Replace the air
conditioning pressure Proceed to Step 2. pressure sensor signal conditioning pressure
sensor signal has an error error sensor

304 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

No. Inspection steps Check results


Check the evaporator
2 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
temperature sensor
Check whether the Check the evaporator
Evaporator temperature
evaporator temperature Proceed to Step 3. temperature sensor and
sensor damaged
sensor is damaged replace if necessary
Check the air conditioning
3 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
compressor
Check whether the
Proceed to Step 4. Compressor damaged Replace the compressor
compressor is damaged
4 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

3 Technical parameters

Tightening torque
Torque
Name Specification Grade Tools
Nm
10mm Hexagon
Compressor fixing bolt M8×1.25×100 8.8 22~30
Sleeve
10mm Hexagon
Fixing bolt between compressor and pipe M8×1.25×30 8.8 25~30
Sleeve
Connecting bolt between condenser pipeline and 10mm Hexagon
M6×1.25×30 8.8 9~12
high-pressure hose Sleeve
10mm Hexagon
Condenser fixing bolt M6×1.25×25 8.8 9~12
Sleeve
Fixing bolt of expansion valve — — 6~7 —
8mm Hexagon
Fixing bolt of expansion valve plate M6×1.0×30 — 9~12
Sleeve
Fixing nut of the air conditioning controller M6×1.0 — 5 —
Pressure switch — — 4.5~6 —
Fixing bolt of air conditioning receiver-drier — — 20~25 10mm Allen key
Connecting nut of air conditioning
— — 22~25 —
high/low-pressure pipe
Connecting nut of air conditioning
— — 12~17 —
high/low-pressure pipe
10mm Hexagon
Fixing nut of heater evaporator assembly M6×1.0 — 9~12
Sleeve
10mm Hexagon
Fixing nut of air intake chamber assembly M6×1.0 — 9~12
Sleeve

Repair Group 73- A/C System 305


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4 DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code


4.1 DTC fault code list
Fault Code Definition
U010000 Loss of communication with EMS
U014000 Loss of communication with BCM
U100700 Bus is turned off
U300317 The battery voltage is too high
U300317 The battery voltage is too low
B130114 Evaporator temperature out of range
B133314 Mode motor open or short fault
B132914 Temperature motor open or short fault
B133614 Internal and external circulation motors open or short fault
B134011 Reference voltage short

4.2 B130114 Evaporator Temperature out of Range


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Wire fault
 Resistance of the
 Evaporation
Evaporator temperature evaporator sensor is out of
B130114 — temperature sensor
out of range the range, over 40KΩ or
fault
less than 209Ω
 Control unit fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect evaporator temperature sensor connector T3at and air conditioning control unit connector T16e, check
evaporator temperature sensor connector T3at and air conditioning control unit connector T16e for crack and abnormality
and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.

306 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Check whether the wire between pin T3at/1 of the evaporator


temperature sensor connector and pin T16e/16 of the air conditioning
control unit connector is open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable.


4. Check whether the pin T3at/1 of the evaporator temperature sensor
connector is short to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 307


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether the pin T3at/1 of the evaporator temperature sensor


connector is short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether pin T3at/3 of the evaporator temperature sensor


connector and the body grounding is conductive.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

7. Check whether power supply and grounding of the air conditioning controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
8. Replace the evaporator temperature sensor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 9.
− No Replace the evaporator temperature sensor.
9. Replace the A/C controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and
its symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the air conditioning controller.

308 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.3 B133314 Mode Motor Open or Short Fault


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Environmental
sensor short to the
 Keep the mode motor battery
operating, and make  Environmental
Mode motor open or mode+ and mode- short for sensor not
B133314 —
short fault one minute or make the connected
mode motor feedback  Exterior
signal open temperature sensor
fault
 Controller fault
Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect mode motor connector T5ee and air conditioning control unit connector T16e, check mode motor connector
T5ee and air conditioning control unit connector T16e for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T5ee/2, T5ee/3 and T5ee/5 of the mode motor connector
and pins T16e/14, T16e/13 and T16e/1 of the air conditioning control
unit connector are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 3.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 309


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Disconnect battery negative cable.


4. Check whether pins T5ee/2, T5ee/3 and T5ee/5 of the mode motor
connector are short to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether pins T5ee/2, T5ee/3 and T5ee/5 of the mode motor
connector are short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

310 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. Check whether the wires between pins T5ee/1 and T5ee/4 of the mode
motor connector and pins T16e/15 and T16e/2 of the air conditioning
control unit connector are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

7. Disconnect battery negative cable.


8. Check whether pins T5ee/1 and T5ee/4 of the mode motor connector
are short to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 8.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 311


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8. Check whether pins T5ee/1 and T5ee/4 of the mode motor connector
are short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 9.

9. Check whether power supply and grounding of the air conditioning controller are normal.
− Yes Proceed to Step 10.
− No, repair the failed wires.
10. Replace the exterior temperature sensor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No Replace exterior temperature sensor
11. Replace the A/C controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code
and its symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the air conditioning controller.

4.4 B132914 Temperature Motor Open or Short Fault


DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Keep the temperature
motor operating, and make
 Wire fault
temperature+ and
Temperature motor  Temperature
B132914 — temperature - short for one
open or short fault mixture motor fault
minute or make the
 Control unit fault
temperature motor
feedback signal open

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect air conditioning controller connector T16e and cooling/heating motor connector T5ay, check air conditioning
controller connector T16e and cooling/heating motor connector T5ay for crack and abnormality and check the pins for
corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.

312 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Disconnect battery negative cable.
3. Check whether pins T5ay/4 and T5ay/5 of the cooling/heating motor
connector are short to the positive terminal of the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

4. Check whether the wires between pins T16e/3 and T16e/4 of the air
conditioning controller connector and pins T5ay/4 and T5ay/5 of the
cooling/heating motor connector are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 313


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Check whether pins T5ay/4 and T5ay/5 of the cooling/heating motor


are short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether pins T5ay/1, T5ay/2 and T5ay/3 of the air


conditioning controller connector are short to the positive terminal of
the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

314 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. Check whether the wires between pins T16e/15, T16e/14 and


T16e/12 of the air conditioning controller connector and pins T5ay/1,
T5ay/2 and T5ay/3 of the cooling/heating motor connector are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 8.

8. Check whether pins T5ay/1, T5ay/2 and T5ay/3 of the air


conditioning controller connector are short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 9.

9. Check whether power supply and grounding of the air conditioning controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 10.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
10. Replace the cooling and heating motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 11.
− No-Replace the cooling/heating motor.
11. Replace the A/C controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code
and its symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the air conditioning controller.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 315


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.5 B133614 Internal and External Circulation Motors Open or Short Fault
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Keep internal and external
circulation motors  Wire fault
Internal and external operating, and make  Inner and outer
B133614 circulation motors open — internal and external circulation motor
or short fault circulation+ and internal fault
and external circulation -  Control unit fault
short for one minute

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect air conditioning controller connector T16e and internal and external circulation motors connectors T5af,
check air conditioning controller connector T16e and mode motor connector T5af for crack and abnormality and check the
pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Disconnect battery negative cable.
3. Check whether pins T16e/5, T16e/6 and T16e/7 of the air
conditioning controller connector are short to the positive terminal of
the battery.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

316 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. Check whether the wires between pins T16e/5, T16e/6 and T16e/7 of
the air conditioning controller connector and pins T5af/1, T5af/2 and
T5af/5 of internal and external circulation motors connectors are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 5.

5. Check whether pins T16e/5, T16e/6 and T16e/7 of the air


conditioning controller connector are short to the body grounding.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 6.

6. Check whether power supply and grounding of the air conditioning controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
7. Replace the mode motor, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 9.
− No-Replace the mode motor.
8. Replace the A/C controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and
its symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the air conditioning controller.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 317


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4.6 U010000 EMS Communication Loss U014000 BCM Communication Loss U100700 Bus Closed
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Fault of air
 EMS message (0x3A0) is conditioner ECU
EMS communication
U010000 — lost for 15s circuit
loss
 Power mode is RUN for 5s  EMS circuit fault
 Controller fault
 Fault of air
 BCM message (0x4A0) is
conditioner ECU
BCM communication lost for 15s
U014000 — circuit
loss  After the power mode is
 BCM circuit fault
RUN for 5s
 Controller fault
 Fault of air
 The relevant ECU has no
conditioner ECU
successful message
U100700 Bus is turned off — circuit
sending in two continuous
 Wire fault
bus off status
 Controller fault

Diagnostic steps:
1. Disconnect air conditioning controller connector T12e and check air conditioning controller connector T12e for crack and
abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Disconnect body controller connector T40b, check the body controller connector T40b for crack and abnormality and
check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 3.

318 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T12e/8 and T12e/7 of the air conditioning controller
connector and pins T40b/36 and T40b/37 of the body controller
connector are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 4.

4. Disconnect engine control unit connector T112 and body controller connector T24, check engine control unit connector
T112 and body controller connector T24 for crack and abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes - Clean the connector and the pin.
− No Proceed to step 5.
5. Check whether wires between pins T112/17 and T112/1 of the engine
control unit connector and pins T40a/9 and T40a/8 of the body controller
connector are conductive.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 6.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 319


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wires
between pins T16j/11 and T16j/3 of the OBD diagnostic interface and
pins T12e/8 and T12e/7 of the air conditioning control unit connector
are open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 7.

7. Check whether power supply and grounding of the air conditioning controller are normal.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.
8. Replace the A/C controller and perform the diagnosis again, read the fault code and determine whether the fault code and
its symptoms remain.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No-Replace the air conditioning controller.

4.7 U300317 Battery Overvoltage U300317 Battery Undervoltage B134011 Reference Voltage
Short
DTC testing
DTC DTC Definition DTC trigger conditions Possible causes
conditions
 Wire fault
 The battery voltage
 Battery voltage is < 9V for
The battery voltage is is too high
U300317 — 500ms
too high  Charging
 Power mode is RUN for 5s
overvoltage
 Controller fault
 Wire fault
 The battery voltage
 Battery voltage is > 16V
The battery voltage is is too low
U300317 — for 500ms;
too low  Charging
 Power mode is RUN for 5s
undervoltage
 Controller fault
 Wire fault
 The battery voltage
 Make the 5V reference
is too low
B134011 Reference voltage short — voltage interface short to
 Charging
ground
undervoltage
 Controller fault

320 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Diagnostic steps:
1. Check whether the battery charging circuit is normal, and whether the terminal is loose and corrodes.
− Repair faulty wire, tighten or clean the terminals.
− No Proceed to step 2.
2. Extract the fuses FB25 (5A) and FB53 (10A) out of the instrument panel electrical box and check whether the fuses FB25
(5A) and FB53 (10A) in the instrument panel electrical box are blown.
− Yes-Replace the fuse.
− No Proceed to step 3.
3. Check whether the battery voltage is within the normal range.
− Yes Proceed to Step 4.
− No, repair or replace battery.
4. Check whether the generator power voltage is within normal range.
− Yes Proceed to Step 5.
− No, repair or replace the generator.
5. Disconnect air conditioning controller connector T12e and check air conditioning controller connector T12e for crack and
abnormality and check the pins for corrosion and rust.
− Yes, clean the connector and pins.
− No Proceed to step 6.
6. With the ignition under ON status, check whether the voltage between
pin T12e/1 of the air conditioning controller connector and the body
grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 7.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 321


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the voltage
between pin T12e/2 of the air conditioning controller connector and the
body grounding is the battery voltage.
− Yes - Proceed to Step 8.
− No - Repair the faulty line.

8. With the ignition under LOCK status, check whether the wire
between pin T12e/3 of the air conditioning controller connector and
body grounding is open.
− Yes-Repair the faulty wire.
− No Proceed to step 9.

9. Replace the airbag controller, re-diagnose and read the fault code to see whether it still exists.
− Yes-Find the cause from other symptoms.
− No - Replace the airbag controller.

322 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5 Electric Digital Display Air Conditioning


5.1 Overview of Functions of the Electric Digital Display Air Conditioning Adjuster

1 - AC Switch 2 - Wind speed+/Wind speed-


 Turning on and off of the refrigeration function control. When the engine is  Reduce air-out speed.
started, press down the air conditioning button, then the refrigeration function
request is output. At this time, ECU will receive the air conditioning request
signal and take control of the air conditioning refrigeration function according
to ECU internal procedure strategy 5s after the engine is started. Press the air
conditioning button and the working condition indicator on the switch lights up.
3 - Air conditioner OFF button 4 - Mode adjustment button
 Press the OFF button and all the air conditioning actuation mechanisms stop  Adjust air-out mode
functioning.No display on the LCD. After the controller monitor is turned down
by the OFF button, two function buttons 8 and 9 still can switch fresh air.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 323


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5 - Internal and external circulation mode 6 - Front defrost quick button


 The yellow indicator of the switch lights up, which  Press air-out mode quick button to switch to front
indicates that the fresh air flap is open and the fresh air defrost and press the button again to restore
can enter into the vehicle compartment. automatically to the last status
7 - Temperature +/ Temperature- 8 - Rear defrost quick button
 Increase air-out temperature  When the rear defrost mode is ON, the switch indicator
lights up; when the defrost mode is OFF, the switch
indicator goes out. The rear windscreen heating can
only work effectively with the engine running and will
shut off automatically after 15 minutes Heating
component inside the rear windscreen is extremely
vulnerable to damage

5.2 Electric digital display air conditioning–Passenger zone

1 - Evaporator temperature sensor 2- Cooling/heating motor


Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 342 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 338
3 - Mode motor 4- Blower motor
Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 338 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 341

324 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5 - Front defrost air duct 6 - Central air duct


 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 343  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 345
7 - Left air vent 8 - Instrument panel
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 349  Remove the instrument panel=>Vehicle body and
painting; Repair group:82; Instrument panel;
Removal and installation of instrument panel.
9 - Right air vent 10 - Air conditioning control panel
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 349  Air conditioner operation panel and DA machine/AVN
navigation operation panel are integrated and located
on DA machine/AVN navigation, which are inseparable
11 - Heater evaporator 12 - Air intake chamber
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 329  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 336
13 - Rear air duct1 14 - Rear air duct2
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 346  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 346
15 - Remove the air conditioning case body assembly 16 - A/C controller
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 325  The air conditioning controller is located behind the
right glove box assembly of the instrument panel
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 337
17 - Multi-functional display
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 220

6 Heater Evaporator Assembly


6.1 Removal and installation of the heater evaporator assembly

Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Hose clamp

Repair Group 73- A/C System 325


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Clamp

Removal

Note

 As there is pressure in the cooling system, release the pressure and reduce the temperature as needed before
repairing.
 When the engine is warming up, the coolant temperature may exceed 100 ℃, so there is danger of scald.Conduct
the repair work after the engine cools down.

1. Fix the coolant hoses -1- and -2- with the hose clamp, release the
coolant hoses clamp -Arrow- with clamp tool, and disengage the heater
core and the coolant hoses -1- and -2-.

2. Insert the pneumatic gun -A- into the coolant pipe on the side of
heater core.
3. Put a container -B- with scales on the other side of the coolant pipe
-C-.

Tips
A container with scale helps to determine the approximate value of
filling volume.

4. Blow the coolant in the heater core into container -B- with the
pneumatic gun, and discharge the coolant as much as possible.
5. Remove expansion valve => Refer to page 382.

326 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. Remove the harness clip -1- and unscrew the nut -Arrow-.
Nut - Arrow- specification:M6×1.0
Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm
Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 10mm hexagon sleeve

7. Remove rear air duct => Refer to page 346.


8. Remove instrument panel beam => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 82; Instrument panel; Removal and
installation of the instrument panel beam.
9. Disengage the connecting plug -1- of the speed control module 2.

Tips
No need to pay attention to the -Arrow-.

10. Disengage the connecting plug -2- on the mode motor -1-.

Tips
No need to attention -Arrow B- or -Arrow A-.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 327


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

11. Disengage the connecting plug -1- on the mode motor -2-.

Tips
No need to pay attention to the -Arrow-.

12. Disengage the connecting plug -2- on the cooling/heating motor -1-.

Tips
No need to pay attention to the -Arrow-.

13. Disengage the connecting plug -2- on the circulating motor -1-.

Tips
No need to pay attention to the -Arrow-.

14. Disengage the connecting plug -2- on the evaporator temperature


sensor -1-.

Tips
No need to pay attention to the -Arrow-.

328 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

15. Unscrew the nut -Arrow-.


Nut - Arrow- specification:M6×1.0
Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm
Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 10mm hexagon sleeve
16. Remove the air conditioning case body assembly.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
Before installation of the air conditioning heater evaporator, check whether the seal sponge at the place of air conditioner
drain pipe is damaged or omitted. It is required that the seal sponge is securely bonded with air conditioning heater
evaporator and uniformly attached to body dash panel!

Tips
Add coolants to the standard level, and check the tightness of the coolant pipeline.

6.2 Disassembly of the heater evaporator assembly

Removal
1. Remove heater evaporator assembly=> Refer to page 325.
2. Disengage the connection between heater evaporator -1- and air intake
chamber -2- from the area of joint part -Arrow A-.

Tips
Pay attention to the positioning pin -Arrow B- when disengaging the
connection between heater evaporator-1- and air intake chamber -2-.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 329


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Pry out the fixing clips on the left and right sides-Arrow A-.
4. Take out the front defroster air duct -1- in the direction of -Arrow B-.

5. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and remove the harness bracket -1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

6. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the left front feet-blowing air
duct and remove the left front feet-blowing air duct assembly -1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

7. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow- of the right front feet-blowing air
duct- and remove the right front feet-blowing air duct assembly -1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

330 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow A- on the blower motor.


Screw -Arrow A- tightening torque:0.7±1.1 Nm
9. Rotate the blower motor in the direction of -Arrow B- slightly, and
remove the blower motor -1- from the heater evaporator assembly
housing.
10. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow C- and remove the speed control
module -2-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

11. Loosen the screw -Arrow- and remove the pipeline clamp-1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

12. Loosen the screw -Arrow- and disengage the pipeline connecting
clamp-1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm
13. Disengage the pipeline from the heater core.

14. Remove the heater core -1- from the heater evaporator housing.
15. Take out the evaporator temperature sensor -2- by rotating in the
direction of -Arrow-.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 331


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

16. Pry up the fixing clip -Arrow- and remove the cover plate -1-.

17. Unscrew the screw -Arrow A-.


Screw -Arrow A- tightening torque:2±3 Nm
18. Pry down the fixing clip -Arrow B- and remove the lower housing -1- of the heater evaporator.

332 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

19. Pry down the fixing clip -Arrow A- and unscrew the screw -Arrow B-.
Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm
20. Disengage heater evaporator left housing -1- and heater evaporator right housing -2-.

Tips
Tip: pay attention to the locking clip at the fixing position of the screw when disengaging heater evaporator left housing and
heater evaporator right housing.
21. Remove the evaporator core -3-.
Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 333


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6.3 Breakdown overview of heater evaporator

1- Cooling/heating motor 2 - Heater evaporator right housing


 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 338  Check, replace if necessary
3 - Heater evaporator left housing 4- Blower motor
 Check, replace if necessary  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 341
5 - Mode motor 6 - Speed control module
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 338  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 342
7 - Evaporation core 8 - Expansion valve
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 370  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 382
9 - Heater evaporator lower housing 10 - Heater core
 Check, replace if necessary  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 366

334 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6.4 Breakdown overview of air intake chamber

1 - Air inlet upper housing 2 - Air inlet lower housing


 Check, replace if necessary  Check, replace if necessary
3 - Upper housing of air intake chamber 4 - Lower housing of air intake chamber
 Check, replace if necessary  Check, replace if necessary
5 - A/C air filter 6 - Cover plate of the air conditioning air filter
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 348  Check, replace if necessary
7 - Circulation motor
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 339

Repair Group 73- A/C System 335


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7 Removal and installation of air intake chamber assembly

Removal
1. Remove instrument panel beam => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 82; Instrument panel; Removal and
installation of the instrument panel beam.
2. Disengage the connecting plug -2- on the circulating motor -1-.

Tips
No need to pay attention to the -Arrow-.

3. Unscrew the nut -Arrow- and remove the air intake chamber
assembly.
Nut - Arrow- specification:M6×1.0
Nut -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm
Operation tool for the nut -arrow-: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

336 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8 Control System
8.1 Removal and installation of the air conditioning controller
Removal
1. Remove the glove box lining=>Vehicle body and painting: Repair group:82; Instrument panel:Removal and
installation of glove box lining.
2. Unscrew the nut -Arrow- of air conditioning controller and remove
the nut -Arrow- from the mounting bracket.
Nut - Arrow- specification:M6×1.0
Nut -Arrow- tightening torque: 5 Nm
Nut -Arrow-Size: 10mm hexagon sleeve

3. Disengage connector -Arrow- and remove the air conditioning


controller -1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.
Set the ignition ON (not necessarily to start the engine) after replacement of the air conditioning controller and configure the
air conditioning controller according to hints of the diagnostic tester.
Connect the diagnostic tester for testing.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 337


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8.2 Removal and installation of mode motor

Removal

Tips
Mode motor is located at the rear of the instrument panel left lower trim panel.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable=>Electrical Equipment: Repair Group: 60; Power Distribution; Battery:
Battery Cables: Disconnection and Connection of Battery Negative Cable.
2. Unscrew the fixing screw of the mode motor -Arrow-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 0.7 - 1.1 Nm
3. Disengage the connecting plug of the mode motor
4. Remove the mode motor -2-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

8.3 Removal and installation of cooling/heating motor

Removal

Tips
The cooling/heating motor is located on the right front baffle side of the auxiliary instrument panel.

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable=>Electrical Equipment: Repair Group: 60; Power Distribution; Battery:
Battery Cables: Disconnection and Connection of Battery Negative Cable.

338 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Unscrew and remove the fixing clip -Arrow A-,


3. Pry down right front cover plate -1 of the auxiliary instrument panel
along the direction of -Arrow B-

4. Unscrew the fixing screw of the cooling/heating motor-Arrow-.


Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 0.7 - 1.1 Nm
5. Disengage the connecting plug -2- of the cooling/heating motor.
6. Remove the cooling/heating motor-1-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

8.4 Removal and installation of circulation motor


Removal
1. Remove the glove box lining=>Vehicle body and painting:Repair group:82; Instrument panel:Removal and
installation of glove box lining.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 339


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow-.


Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 0.7 - 1.1 Nm
3. Disengage the connecting plug -2- of the circulation motor.
4. Remove the circulation motor-1-.

Tips
Do not change the position of circulating air flap.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
Check the functions of the circulating air flap after the installation.

340 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8.5 Removal and installation of pressure switch

Removal

Tips
Pressure switch is located in the right rear of the engine compartment.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable=>Electrical Equipment: Repair Group: 60; Power Distribution; Battery:
Battery Cables: Disconnection and Connection of Battery Negative Cable.
2. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group:
01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.
3. Disengage the connecting plug of the pressure switch-Arrow-A and
unscrew the high-pressure pipe from the pressure switch -1-.
Pressure switch -1- tightening torque:4.5 - 6 Nm

Tips
Seal all the opened refrigerant circuit components with suitable sealing
cover to prevent air or other impurities from entering.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Replace the O-ring when installing
 Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

8.6 Removal and installation of blower motor

Removal
Tips
The blower motor is located at the right side of the accelerator pedal.
1. Remove electric power steering controller => chassis; Repair Group: 45; Steering system; Removal and installation
of the electric power steering controller.
2. Remove mounting bracket of the electric power steering controller.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 341


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow B- on the blower motor.


Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 0.7 - 1.1 Nm
4. Disengage the connecting plug -2- on the blower motor.
5. Rotate the blower motor in the direction of -Arrow A- slightly, and
remove the blower motor -1- from the heater evaporator assembly
housing.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

8.7 Removal and installation of speed control module

Removal

Tips
Speed control module is located on the side of the blower motor.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable=>Electrical Equipment: Repair Group: 60; Power Distribution; Battery:
Battery Cables: Disconnection and Connection of Battery Negative Cable.
2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 0.7 - 1.1 Nm
3. Disengage the connecting plug -1- of the speed control module.
4. Remove the speed control module -2-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

8.8 Evaporator temperature sensor

Removal

342 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Tips
Evaporator temperature sensor is located on the side of the cooling/heating motor (bottom).
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable=>Electrical Equipment: Repair Group: 60; Power Distribution; Battery:
Battery Cables: Disconnection and Connection of Battery Negative Cable.
2. Unscrew and remove the fixing clip -Arrow A- and pry down the
right front cover plate -2- along the direction of -Arrow B-.

3. Disengage the connecting plug -2- of evaporator temperature sensor.


4. Take out the evaporator temperature sensor -1- by rotating in the
direction of -Arrow-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

9. Distribution System
9.1 Removal and installation of front defroster air duct
Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:82; Instrument panel; Removal and
installation of instrument panel.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 343


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Pry out the fixing clips on the left and right sides-Arrow A-.
3. Take out the front defroster air duct -1- in the direction of -Arrow B-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

9.2 Removal and installation of the center air vent duct

Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:82; Instrument panel; Removal and
installation of instrument panel.

2. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow-.

344 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm


3. Remove the side air vent duct.
Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

9.3 Removal and installation of rear air duct


The rear feet-blowing air duct is available to the high configuration vehicle model only.
Removal

Tips
To just remove the lower rear air duct of the seat, there is no need to remove the instrument panel but the auxiliary
instrument panel underframe.
1. Remove the front seat=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:89; Seat:Removal and installation of seat.
2. Remove the auxiliary instrument panel underframe=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:84; Interior
equipment; Removal and installation of auxiliary instrument panel underframe.
3. Remove the left A-pillar lower trim panel=>Vehicle body and painting; Repair group:84; Interior equipment;
Removal and installation of A-pillar lower trim panel.
4. Lift up the front carpet.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 345


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow C-.


Screw -Arrow C - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm
6. Pry out fixing clip -Arrow B- of the rear air duct with tools.
7. Remove the rear air duct from the heater evaporator assembly in the direction of -Arrow A-.
Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
Check all the fixing clips and replace if necessary.

9.4 Removal and installation of air conditioning air filter element

Removal

Tips
Air conditioning air filter element is located above the footwell on the front passenger side.

346 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1. Disengage the fixing clip and remove the air conditioning air filter
cover -1-.

2. Remove the A/C air filter element -1-.

Tips
Pay attention to the regulations on disposal!

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
When installing, place the air conditioning air filter element -1- with the
arrow pointing to the driver's side

Repair Group 73- A/C System 347


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9.5 Removal and installation of side air vent


Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Plastic skid plate

Removal
1. Pry out side vent assemblies -1- and-2- at the position of -Arrow- with
tools.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

9.6 Removal and installation of center vent


Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

348 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Plastic skid plate

Removal
1. Pry out the center vent assembly -1- at the position of -Arrow- with
tools.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

9.7 Removal and installation of the defrost cover plate


Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Plastic skid plate

Repair Group 73- A/C System 349


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Removal
1. Pry down the left defrost cover plate -1- and right defrost cover plate
-2- from the instrument panel body with tools.

2. Pry down the front defrost cover plate -1- from the instrument panel
body with tools.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

350 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9.8 Ventilation grille

Tips
 Extra air will escape from the ventilation grille behind the trunk trim panel.
 Do not cover up the vent in order to ventilate normally.
 The ventilation grille frame is positioned in the side panel of the rear bumper zone.

9.8.1 Inspection of ventilation grille

Tips
 Ventilation grille can be checked from the inside of the trunk.
 Remove the additional parts according to the vehicle equipment.

1. Remove the wheel cover trim panel=> Vehicle Body and Painting; Repair group:84; Interior equipment; Removal
and installation of wheel cover trim panel.
2. The sealing lips of the ventilation device on the two sides of the vehicle must move freely and close automatically, or it
may be damaged.

9.8.2 Removal and installation of ventilation grille


Removal
1. Remove the rear bumper panel=>Vehicle Body and Painting; Repair Group:83; Exterior equipment; Removal and
installation of rear bumper panel.
2. Remove the ventilation grille unit -1- from the side panel.

Tips
If necessary, remove the wheel cover trim panel and release the fixing
clip of the ventilation unit from the inside of trunk.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 351


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

10 Pipeline System
10.1 Brief introduction

Note

 Repair the air conditioning system pipeline only after discharging the refrigerant completely.
 Refrigerant discharging is required to use special equipment.
 Wear goggles and gloves when discharging refrigerant.
 Keep the working area of ventilation and turn on the workshop exhaust system.
 Seal immediately the air conditioning refrigeration system pipeline once it is opened to prevent from moisture and
dirt.
 The sealing ring of air conditioning refrigeration system pipeline is a disposable part that must be replaced after
removal and dipped in the refrigerant oil before installation.
 When installing air conditioning pipeline, compressor, condenser and evaporator, connect them to the system upon
removal of the sealing plug for fear of entry of moisture and dust

Various part assemblies of air conditioning system are installed in various parts of the vehicle.The air conditioning pipes
connect these part assemblies together and seal them to form a complete air conditioning system. If the compressor is the
heart of the air conditioning refrigerant system, then the air conditioning pipeline is the blood vessels of the system,
transferring refrigerant in different states. R-134a refrigerant is used in the air conditioning system of this model.

Classification of air conditioning pipeline


 Classified based on pressure
− High-pressure pipe
The pipe starting from compressor via condenser to expansion valve.
− Low-pressure pipe
The pipe starting from expansion valve via evaporator to compressor.
 Classified based on the state of refrigerant
− Gas pipe
The refrigerant in the pipeline is in a gas state.
− Liquid pipe
The refrigerant in the pipeline is in a liquid state.

Air conditioning pipeline system is used for transferring refrigerant among different parts of the air conditioning system.
R-134a air conditioning pipeline equipped in the vehicle is composed of a Nylon hose sandwiched between the rubber
layers. This type of Nylon hose is easy for loading R-134a refrigerant, with the molecular structure smaller than P-12. Ends
of the refrigerant hoses are made of aluminum or steel, with brass connectors commonly used.

Twist or bend of the pipeline system may weaken the performance of the whole air conditioning system, and reduce
refrigerant flow in the system. All the bending radius of flexible hoses should be at least 10 times of the ose diameter, the
refrigerant hose must be kept 80 mm (3 inches) away from the exhaust manifold and exhaust pipe.

352 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

10.2 Overview of piping system

1 - Low-pressure hose assembly 2 - High-pressure service interface valve


 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 375  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 386
3- Low-pressure service interface valve 4 - Low-pressure pipe assembly
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 386  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 374
5 - High-pressure pipe assembly 6 - High-pressure pipe assembly 2-.
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 378  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 378
7- Compressor 8 - Receiver-drier
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 355  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 363
9 - Evaporator 10 - Expansion valve
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 363  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 382
11 - Condenser 12 - Engine oil pressure switch
 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 363  Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 341

Repair Group 73- A/C System 353


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

13 - High-pressure hose assembly


 Removal and installation=>Refer to Page 377

10.3 Air conditioning compressor


10.3.1 Overview
There is identification mark of R-134a refrigerant on the compressor.
How It Works
Air conditioning compressor
The engine will drive the compressor through the electronic clutch, drive pulley and drive belt. The air conditioning
compressor can be lubricated with refrigerant oil, with the refrigerant oil and the refrigerant circulating in the refrigeration
system.
The air conditioning compressor will absorb the low pressure refrigerant vapor from the evaporator through air intake. It
then compresses refrigerant into refrigerant vapor with high pressure and high temperature.Afterwards, it pumps the vapor
into the condenser through compressor discharge hole.
The compressor can not be repaired. If fault or damage occurs, replace the entire compressor assembly. The compressor
clutch, pulley and bearing assembly as well as the clutch excitation coil can be repaired.
High-pressure relief valve
The high-pressure relief valve is located on the compressor cylinder head, which is located at the back of the air
conditioning compressor. This mechanical valve is used for discharging refrigerant from the air conditioning system, to
avoid damage to the compressor and other parts of refrigeration system caused by condenser airflow blockage or excessive
filling of refrigerant.
When the discharge pressure reaches 4.0±0.4MPA or higher, the high-pressure relief valve will enable the system to relief
the pressure. When the discharge pressure reaches to its minimum value of 3.25MPA, the high-pressure relief valve will be
shut off.
Proper amount of refrigerant will be discharged by the high-pressure relief valve to reduce the system pressure, then the
high-pressure relief valve will reset. Most of the refrigerant will be stored in the air conditioning system. The refrigerant
discharged from the high-pressure relief valve does not indicate that there is fault with the valve.
The high-pressure relief valve is a factory calibration device. It can not be adjusted, repaired, or removed; otherwise, it will
be affected, and the valve can only be repaired as a part of the compressor assembly.

10.3.2 Installation Suggestions for Air Conditioning Compressor


Important notice:
Precautions: The symmetry plane of corresponding grooves of compressor electromagnetic clutch pulley and engine
crankshaft pulley must coincide, with an error not exceeding 20'.
No air or water enters into the system while installing the air conditioning compressor.
Pay attention to the refrigerant oil quantity in the air conditioning system; if the filling quantity exceeds the standard, refill
in accordance with 150g (oil)/1000g (refrigerant).Fill the lost quantity after repairing the air conditioning pipe due to burst
or leak.

354 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

When filling the refrigerant oil in the air conditioning compressor, fill according to the specification (PAG56 refrigerant oil)
on the compressor nameplate. Do not mix it with different refrigerant oil.
Our company can provide the above-mentioned refrigerant oil to customers.
The scroll series of compressors are well-suited for environmental friendly refrigerant R134a. Counterfeit R-134a
refrigerant may cause irreparable damage to the compressor.
During installation, the inlet and outlet joints of the pipeline should be consistent with the S and D ports of the compressor.
Ensure that the compressor runs along the direction indicated on the nameplate (clockwise viewed from the clutch).
Do not refill the liquid refrigerant from the low pressure side of the compressor,or it may damage the compressor
components.
Do not fill excessive refrigerant, or it may cause compressor bearing fault and air conditioning system fault.
While connecting the pipe, apply a little refrigerant oil on the O-shaped seal ring and tighten the connector. As for the
removal and installation of threaded connector of the pipeline, use two wrenches.One is for fixing the external threaded
connector, and the other for tightening the nut.
Adjustment of drive belt:
 After installation, apply a force of 100N to the belt in the position
of -Arrow-.Measure to check whether the belt deformation is
within the standard deviation range .
Standard deviation -a-: 10.9~16.5mm
 Start the engine and check the belt running.

10.3.3 Removal and installation of compressor assembly


Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Torque wrench

Repair Group 73- A/C System 355


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Air conditioning refrigerant


charge and discharge
machine

The refrigerant must be used to flush the refrigerant circulation circuit under the following conditions:
 There is dirt or other impurities in the refrigerant circulation circuit.
 When the sealing refrigerant circulation circuit is drained, the vacuum display is not stable (there is water in the
refrigerant circulation circuit which generates pressure).
 The time that the refrigerant circulation circuit is open exceeds the normal assembly time (e.g. after an accident).
 It can be assumed that there is water in the refrigerant circulation circuit based on the pressure and temperature in the
refrigerant circulation circuit.
 The amount of refrigerant oil in the refrigerant circulation circuit is not clear.
 The A/C compressor must be replaced due to internal damage (e.g. noise or no power).

Removal
1. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group: 01:
General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.
2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 7.
3. Remove lower panel of the front bumper. =>Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment;
Removal and installation of the front bumper lower panel.
4. Remove the right front wheel cover fender. => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment;
Removal and installation of the front wheel cover fender.
5. Unscrew the fixing bolt of the generator -Arrow B-, and then press
the belt regulating bolt counterclockwise -Arrow A-.
Bolt -Arrow A- specification:M8×1.25×80
Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 4 - 6 Nm
Bolt -Arrow A- tool: 12mm hexagon sleeve
Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications:M8×1.25×40
Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque: 19 - 25 Nm
Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 12mm hexagon sleeve

6. Push the generator towards the engine to the limit position, and disengage the A/C compressor belt.

356 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

7. Disconnect the connecting plug-1- of the compressor.


8. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow- and disengage refrigerant pipeline -2-
on the A/C compressor.
Bolt -Arrow- specification: M8×1.25×30
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 22 - 30 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

10. Unscrew 4 fixing bolts -3- of the compressor assembly and remove the compressor assembly.
Bolt -3- specification: M8×1.25×100
Bolt -3- tightening torque: 22 - 30 Nm
Bolt -3- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Repair Group 73- A/C System 357


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Tips

 When the A/C compressor is stuck, disengage the overload protection device from the A/C compressor shaft. In most
cases, it can be determined whether the A/C compressor is stuck through the bulge on the multi-wedge belt. In addition,
it can be determined whether the compressor is stuck through the abrasion of rubber on the multi-wedge belt.
 To prevent the compressor from being damaged when draining the refrigerant circulation circuit, the compressor is
equipped with a secure oil supply system:40~50cm³of refrigerant oil is left in the A/C compressor.
 The engine cannot be started until the refrigerant circulation circuit has been assembled as required. For example, if
the refrigerant piping is not connected with the A/C compressor, the compressor will run along with the running engine,
thus heat will be generated due to internal friction, and result in damage to the compressor.
 When there is no refrigerant in the refrigerant circulation circuit, then the A/C compressor control valve cannot be
started.Thus the A/C compressor will start idle running with the engine.
 If the engine should be started when the refrigerant circulation circuit is drained, then:

a. Refrigerant circulation circuit must be assembled completely.


b. 1/4 of the amount of refrigerant in refrigerant circulation circuit must be left in A/C compressor.
c. Engine speed must not exceed 2000rpm.
d. When the engine has to run, it can not run more than 10 minutes.

10.3.4 Compressor clutch

The air conditioning compressor clutch assembly is composed of excitation coil of fixed electromagnetic clutch, as well as
transmission wheel bearings and drive wheel assembly, clutch plate and gasket. Compressor clutch adopts the method of
electrical engagement and separation for the drive belt of compressor and engine parts.
The excitation coil of clutch and drive wheel bearings as well as drive wheel assembly are all fixed on the top of the
compressor with retainers. The clutch plate is connected to the compressor shaft by keys and fixed by nuts.

358 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

10.3.5 Removal and installation of compressor clutch


Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

T41137301-Fixing wrench of compressor pulley T61137301-Removal tool of compressor pulley

T61137302-Installation tool of compressor pulley

Removal
1. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine.
2. Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery=>Refer to Page 355.
3. Remove front bumper lower panel => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment; Removal
and installation of the front bumper lower panel.
4. Remove front wheel cover fender => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group: 83; Exterior equipment; Removal
and installation of the front wheel cover fender.
5. Unscrew the fixing bolt of the generator -Arrow B-, and then press the
belt regulating bolt counterclockwise -Arrow A-.
Bolt -Arrow A- specification:M8×1.25×80
Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 4 - 6 Nm
Bolt -Arrow A- tool: 12mm hexagon sleeve
Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications:M8×1.25×40
Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque: 19 - 25 Nm

Repair Group 73- A/C System 359


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 12mm hexagon sleeve


6. Push the generator towards the engine to the limit position, and disengage the A/C compressor belt.
7. Fix the clutch disc -1- with the compressor pulley fixing wrench -
T41137301-, and remove the fixing nut -Arrow-.
Nut - Arrow- specification:M8×1.25
Nut -Arrow- tightening torque: 18 Nm
Bolt -Arrow - tool: 13mm hexagon sleeve

Note

 Do not pry between the clutch disc and the driving wheel when removing the clutch disc from the clutch shaft, or
else it will damage the clutch disc.
 Be careful not to lose any clutch pad during the removal of the clutch, because the pads may be used during the
installation of the clutch disc.

8. Gently tab the clutch disc -3- and disconnect it from the spline on the
compressor shaft -1-, and remove the clutch disc -3- and the pad -2- on
the compressor shaft.

360 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9. Remove the fixing clamp -2- which fixes the compressor clutch
driving wheel and the bearing assembly -1-.

10. As shown in the figure: extract the compressor clutch driving wheel
and the bearing assembly-1- in the direction of -Arrow- using the puller
and the removal tool of the compressor pulley -T61137301-.

11. Remove harness fixing screw -Arrow- of the clutch excitation coil
-2- and disengage the harness connector.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 3 - 4 Nm
12. Remove the the fixing clamp -1- of the clutch excitation coil -2-, and
remove the clutch excitation coil -2-.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Note

The pad may be compressed after tightening the nut.Check whether the air gaps on 4 positions or more are still correct,
and rotate the driving wheel before checking the air gap for the last time. If the air gap can not meet the requirement,
please add or reduce the pad as needed, until the air gap can meet the requirement.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 361


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1. Align the positioning pin -Arrow A- at the back of the clutch


excitation coil -1- with the slot -Arrow B- on the compressor front
cover, and then locate the excitation coil on the compressor to determine
the correct orientation and wiring layout of the clutch excitation coil. so
as to prevent the wiring harness from being sandwiched between the
compressor front cover and the clutch excitation coil.

Note

 If a snap ring is not located in slot, then it must have been vibrated out, thus causing the clutch fault and severe
damage to the compressor.
 A new snap ring must be used to fix the clutch excitation coil on the A/C compressor, with the slope of the snap ring
outward.
2. Install fixing clamp -1- of the clutch excitation coil -2-.
3. Tighten fixing screw -Arrow- of the clutch harness and install the
connecting plug of the clutch coil wire.

Note

Do not damage the driving wheel friction surface when installing the driving wheel and the bearing, or else it may cause
premature fault of the clutch.
4. Use compressor pulley installation tools- T61137302-to install driving
wheel and bearing assembly -1- on the front cover of compressor.
5. Install the external snap ring to fix the driving wheel and bearing
assembly to the front cover of compressor housing, to make sure that the
snap ring is located properly in the slot in place.

362 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. If previous clutch disc -3-, driving wheel and bearing assembly are
re-used, then the old pad -2- can be installed on the compressor shaft -1-
near the shaft shoulder.If new clutch disc, driving wheel and bearing
assembly are used, then install a trial pad with the size of 0.3/0.4/0.5
mm on the shaft shoulder.

10.3.6 Inspection of compressor clutch disc

1. Check whether the friction surface of the drive wheel and clutch disc
-3- are worn.If there is excessive wear or scratch, replace the drive
wheel and the clutch disc.
2 .If refrigerant oil is stuck on the friction surface, check whether there
is refrigerant oil on compressor shaft-1- and head parts.
3. If refrigerant oil is found, then oil leaks from the oil seal of the
compressor shaft.Replace the compressor.
4. Check whether drive wheel bearings of clutch are rugged or leaky
seriously.Replace the drive wheel and the bearing assembly if necessary.

10.3.7 Compressor clutch plate run-in


After the installation of a new compressor clutch, the clutch should be circulated 20 times (engaging for 5 seconds and
disengaging for 5 seconds).During this period, set the air conditioning controller on Cycle Mode with the blower motor at
its maximum speed. With the engine speed of 1500~2000r/min, this process (run-in)will get the relative friction surface
running-ins and provide high compressor clutch torque.

10.4 Removal and installation of condenser


Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Repair Group 73- A/C System 363


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Torque wrench

Air conditioning refrigerant


charge and discharge

Removal

Tips

 Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed.
 After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal
plug.
1. Turn off the ignition and all the electrical equipment, and remove the ignition key.
2. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group: 01:
General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.

Tips
It is illegal to discharge the refrigerant into the surrounding environment.
3. Remove the front bumper component=>Vehicle Body and Painting; Repair Group:83; Exterior equipment; Removal
and installation of front bumper component.

364 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. Disconnect the connecting plug -Arrow- of the hood lock assembly


and disengage the fixing clip bracket -1- from the harness.

5. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow B- of refrigerant pipeline bracket.


Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications:M6×1.0×15
Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque:6±10 Nm
Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve
6. Unscrew the fixing nut -Arrow A- of refrigerant pipeline and
disengage the refrigerant pipeline connector -1-.
Nut -Arrow A- specification:M6×1.0
Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 6 - 12 Nm
Nut -Arrow A- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

7. Unscrew the fixing nut of the refrigerant pipe -Arrow-, and disengage
the refrigerant pipe connector -1- from the joint of condenser.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M6×1.0×15
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 12 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve

Repair Group 73- A/C System 365


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

8. Unscrew the bolt -Arrow A- and remove the bracket -1-.


Bolt - Arrow A - Specifications:M6×1.0×12
Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 6 - 12 Nm
Bolt -Arrow A- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve
Unscrew the fixing bolt –Arrow B- connecting the condenser with the
radiator, and remove the condenser 2.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M6×1.0×15
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve

Tips
To prevent the condenser blade damage, pay attention to avoid the sharp parts when removing the condenser.
Seal all the opened refrigerant circuit components with suitable sealing cover to prevent air or other impurities from
entering.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips

 Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine.


 Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

10.5 Removal and installation of heater core

Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

366 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Hose clamp

Clamp

Removal

Note

 As there is pressure in the cooling system, release the pressure and reduce the temperature as needed before
repairing.
 When the engine is warming up, the coolant temperature may exceed 100 ℃, so there is danger of scald.Conduct
the repair work after the engine cools down.
 Put a towel on the front passenger carpet to collect the flowing coolant

Removal
1. Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 367


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Fix the coolant hoses -1- and -2- with the hose clamp, release the
coolant hoses clamp -Arrow- with clamp tool, and disengage the heater
core and the coolant hoses -1- and -2-.

3. Insert the pneumatic gun -A- into the coolant pipe on the side of
heater core.
4. Put a container -B- with scales on the other side of the coolant pipe
-C-.
5. Blow the coolant in the heater core into container -B- with the
pneumatic gun, and discharge the coolant as much as possible.

Tips
Remove the heater core from the driver’s foot area under the instrument
panel at the right side.
 Remove fixing bracket of the heater core right harness.
6. Loosen the bolt -Arrow- and remove the pipeline clamp -1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm
7. Disengage the pipeline from the heater core.
8. Remove the heater core from the heater evaporator housing.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:
1. Check whether the heating device housing is clean after removing the heater core.
2. If necessary, remove the residues or stains of coolant spilled out from the heating device housing.
3. Insert the heater core into heating device housing.

368 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. It is necessary to soak the sealing ring -1- of the pipeline interface


with coolant before installation.

Tips
Replace the sealing ring -1- after each removal.

5. Connect the heater core with the coolant pipe.


6. Install the clamp -1-, which should be able to rotate easily on coolant
pipe and tighten the fixing bolt -Arrow-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm

Tips
 Replace the clamp if it is deformed.
 Check the position of clamp -1- after tightening the bolt.The clamp
should envelop the heater core and the flange on the coolant pipe
securely.

Tips
 Replace all the sealing rings.
 Fill the coolant to the standard level.
 Check whether the coolant circulation system is sealed, and particularly pay attention to the connection between
coolant pipe and heater core.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 369


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

10.6 Removal and installation of evaporation core

Removal
1. Remove heater evaporator assembly=> Refer to page 325.
2. Disengage the connection between heater evaporator -1- and air
intake chamber -2- from the area of joint part -Arrow A-.

Tips
Pay attention to the positioning pin -Arrow B- when disengaging the
connection between heater evaporator-1- and air intake chamber -2-.

3. Pry out the fixing clips on the left and right sides-Arrow A-.
4. Take out the front defroster air duct -1- in the direction of -Arrow B-.

5. Unscrew the screw -Arrow- and remove the harness bracket -1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

370 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow A- on the blower motor.


Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 0.7 - 1.1 Nm
7. Rotate the blower motor in the direction of -Arrow B- slightly, and
remove the blower motor -1- from the heater evaporator assembly
housing.
8. Unscrew the fixing screw -Arrow C- and remove the speed control
module -2-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

9. Loosen the screw -Arrow- and remove the pipeline clamp-1-.


Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm

10. Loosen the bolt -Arrow- and disengage the pipeline connecting
clamp-1-.
Screw -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm
11. Disengage the pipeline from the heater core.

12. Remove the heater core -1- from the heater evaporator housing.
13. Take out the evaporator temperature sensor -2- by rotating in the
direction of -Arrow-.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 371


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

14. Pry up the fixing clip -Arrow- and remove the cover plate -1-.

15. Unscrew the screw -Arrow A-.


Screw -Arrow A- tightening torque:2±3 Nm
16. Pry down the fixing clip -Arrow B- and remove the lower housing -1- of the heater evaporator.

372 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

17. Pry down the fixing clip -Arrow A- and unscrew the screw -Arrow B-.
Screw -Arrow B- tightening torque: 2 - 3 Nm
18. Disengage heater evaporator left housing -1- and heater evaporator right housing -2-.

Tips
Tip: pay attention to the locking clip at the fixing position of the screw when disengaging heater evaporator left housing and
heater evaporator right housing.
19. Remove the evaporator core -3-.
Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 373


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

10.7 Removal and installation of low-pressure pipe

Removal

Tips
In order to better display the layout of air conditioning pipeline in a real vehicle, the figure just shows the route of the air
conditioning pipeline.

1. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group:
01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.

2. Disengage the corresponding fixing clip.


3. Remove the pressure plate bolt -Arrow A-, and remove the pressure plate.
Bolt - Arrow A - Specifications:M6×1.0×30
Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm
Bolt -Arrow A- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve
4. Unscrew the low-pressure pipe connector nut -Arrow B-.
Nut -Arrow B- tightening torque: 22 - 25 Nm
Nut -Arrow B-Tool: 27mm open wrench

374 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Tips
Nut -Arrow B-Tool fixing tool in removal: 24mm open wrench
5. Remove the low-pressure pipe -1-.

Tips
 Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed.
 After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal
plug.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine.
 Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

10.8 Removal and installation of low-pressure hose

Removal
Tips
In order to better display the layout of air conditioning pipeline in a real vehicle, the figure just shows the route of the air
conditioning pipeline.

1. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group:
01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 375


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Unscrew the low-pressure pipe connector nut -Arrow A-.


Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 22 - 25 Nm
Nut -Arrow A-Tool: 27mm open wrench

Tips
Nut -Arrow A-Tool fixing tool in removal: 24mm open wrench

3. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow B- that secures the compressor and the pipe.
Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications:M8×1.25×30
Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque: 25 - 30 Nm
Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve
4. Remove the low-pressure hose -1-.

Tips
 Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed.
 After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal
plug.

376 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine.
 Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

10.9 Removal and installation of high-pressure hose

Removal

Tips
In order to better display the layout of air conditioning pipeline in a real vehicle, the figure just shows the route of the air
conditioning pipeline.
1. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group:
01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.

2. Unscrew the nut -Arrow A- connecting the high-pressure hose with the condenser and disengage the high-pressure hose
from the condenser.
Nut -Arrow A- specification:M6×1.0

Repair Group 73- A/C System 377


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 6 - 12 Nm


Nut -Arrow A- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve
3. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow B- that secures the compressor and the pipe.
Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications:M8×1.25×30
Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque: 25 - 30 Nm
Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve
4. Remove the high-pressure hose.

Tips
 Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed.
 After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal
plug.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine.
 Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

10.10 Removal and installation of high-pressure pipe

High-pressure pipe assembly 1


Removal

Tips
In order to better display the layout of air conditioning pipeline in a real vehicle, the figure just shows the route of the air
conditioning pipeline.
1. Turn off the ignition and all the electrical equipment, and remove the ignition key.
2. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group:
01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.

378 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. Disengage the corresponding fixing clip.


4. Remove the pressure plate bolt -Arrow B- and remove the pressure plate.
Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications:M6×1.0×30
Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque:6~9 Nm
Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve
5. Unscrew the high-pressure pipe connector nut -Arrow A-.
Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 12 - 17 Nm
Nut -Arrow A-Tool: 19mm open wrench

Tips
Nut -Arrow A-Tool fixing tool in removal: 17mm open wrench

6. Disconnect the pressure switch connecting plug.


7. Remove the high-pressure pipe assembly -1-.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 379


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Tips
 Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed.
 After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal
plug.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine.
 Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

High-pressure pipe assembly 2


Removal

Tips
In order to better display the layout of air conditioning pipeline in a real vehicle, the figure just shows the route of the air
conditioning pipeline.
1. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group:
01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.
2. Remove the retaining buckle -Arrow A- of the front bumper lower
protective panel, unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow B- and remove the front
bumper lower protective panel -1-.
Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications:M6×1.0×16
Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque:8±12 Nm
Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve

380 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Unscrew nut -Arrow A- of the high-pressure pipe assembly.


Nut -Arrow A- tightening torque: 12 - 17 Nm
Nut -Arrow A-Tool: 19mm open wrench

Tips
Nut -Arrow A-Tool fixing tool in removal: 17mm open wrench
4. Unscrew the bolt -Arrow B-.
Bolt - Arrow B - Specifications:M6×1.0×30
Bolt -Arrow B- tightening torque:9~12 Nm
Bolt -Arrow B- tool: 10mm hexagon sleeve
5. Remove the high-pressure pipe assembly -1-.

Tips
 Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed.
 After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal
plug.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 381


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine.
 Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

10.11 Removal and installation of expansion valve


Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Torque wrench

Air conditioning refrigerant


charge and discharge

Removal

Tips
 Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed.
 After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal
plug.

1. Turn off the ignition and all the electrical equipment, and remove the ignition key.

382 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group:
01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.
3. Unscrew the bolt -Arrow-, remove the pressure plate-2- and pull out
the refrigerant pipe -1-.
Bolt - Arrow - Specifications:M6×1.0×30
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 9 - 12 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 8mm hexagon sleeve

4. Unscrew the expansion valve screw -Arrow-, and remove the


expansion valve -2- together with the seal sponge -1-.
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 6 - 7 Nm

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine.
 Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

10.12 Air conditioning receiver-drier

Special Tools and Maintenance Equipment Required

Repair Group 73- A/C System 383


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Torque wrench

Air conditioning refrigerant


charge and discharge
machine

Removal
Tips
 There is no need to remove the front bumper component for the removal of the air conditioning receiver-drier. In order
to achieve a better visual effect, the figure has not drawn the front bumper component.
 Replace all the sealing rings on the refrigerant pipeline every time when the pipe is removed.
 After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal
plug.

1. Turn off the ignition and all the electrical equipment, and remove the ignition key.
2. Discharge the refrigerant with air conditioning refrigerant charge and discharge machine => General; Repair Group:
01: General information; Maintenance: Check /replacement of working fluid: Refrigerant.
3. Remove the front bumper component=>Vehicle Body and Painting; Repair Group:83; Exterior equipment; Removal
and installation of front bumper component.

384 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

4. Unscrew the plug screw -3-.


Bolt -3- tightening torque :20±25 Nm
Plug screw -3-Tool: 10mm hexagon screwdriver sleeve
5. Take out the filter screen -1- and the sealing ring -2-, and pull the air conditioning receiver-drier downwards until it
comes out.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Fill the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine.
 Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 385


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

10.13 Service interface valve core


10.13.1 Brief introduction
The refrigeration system service interface can be used for vacuuming, filling and testing the air conditioning refrigeration
system.
The protective cap can be helpful for the sealing of the service interface and preventing the refrigeration system from being
polluted. Remember to reinstall the protective cap on the service interface after completing the maintenance of the
refrigeration system.
Use connectors of different outer diameters for the high- and low-voltage ends, to ensure not to confuse the connectors for
service interface.
1. Service interface
2. Service interface valve core
3. Service interface protective cap

The protective cap can be helpful for the sealing of the service interface and preventing the refrigeration system from
being polluted. Remember to reinstall the protective cap on the service interface after completing the maintenance of
the refrigeration system.
Upon delivery, each service interface is equipped with a plastic protection cap with thread.The protection cap of service
interface is a maintainable item.

10.13.2 Removal and installation of service interface valve core


Removal

Danger

Please refer to relevant warnings and notes of this system before repair work. Failure to observe the warnings and notes
may result in death or serious personal injury.

386 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1. Remove the protective cap -1- on the service interface -2-.


2. Recycle the refrigerant in the refrigeration system=>Refer to Page
388 .
3. Remove the valve core -3- on the service interface with the service
interface adapter component.
4.Use plug or adhesive tape on the open-mouthed service interface.

Tips
After removing the refrigerant circulation pipeline, pay attention to sealing the air conditioning circulation with seal plug.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures and please note the following:

Tips
 Lubricate the valve core with refrigerant oil before installation.
 Check the sealing of the refrigerant circulation circuit.

11 Inspection of Condensate Water Discharge Hose

 Check whether the condensate water discharge hose -1- ages and cracks and if aged, replace the condensate water
discharge hose.
 Check whether the condensate water discharge hose -1- is blocked by impurities and if blocked, clean the condensate
water discharge hose.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 387


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

12 Refrigerant
12.1 Refrigerant recovery

Recover the refrigerant with a refrigerant charge and discharge machine.


For correct maintenance and usage of the equipment, please refer to the
instruction manual provided by the equipment manufacturer.

Air conditioning refrigerant


charge and discharge

If the following conditions occur, do not use the recovered refrigerant:


 Compressor damaged (external leakage and external damage).
 Black or viscous material is found in the refrigerant.
 Unable to determine the type of refrigerant.
Tips
 Take necessary actions for personal safety protection when carrying out relevant maintenance on the refrigerant, and
avoid touching or inhaling the refrigerant.
 A container with refrigerant should be stored in a cool place.Do not place it in sunlight or at a high temperature to
prevent it from expanding and bursting.
 Refrigerant and refrigerant oil must be stored as required and protected from mixing with water or other impurities in
the air.

12.2 Refrigeration system vacuum

Note

Particularly effective methods must be adopted to prevent the water from leaking into the refrigerant oil of air
conditioning system. It is difficult to remove water from the refrigerant oil and the reliability of the compressor may be
problematic.
If the air conditioning compressor which uses HFC-134a refrigerant is exposed to the atmosphere for a long time, it is
advisable to discharge the original refrigerant oil and replace it with new oil or use a new air conditioning compressor. In
this way, pollution of the refrigeration system can be eliminated.
If the refrigerant is exposed to the atmosphere, the system must be vacuumed before refilling.
Mixing of water, air and refrigerant will make the pressure of compressor head rise to exceed the normal range. This will
affect the system performance and damage the air conditioning compressor.
Check whether the connector valve is tightened when connecting the device connector to the pipe connector.
1. Recycling of refrigerant=> Refer to page 388.

388 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

2. Connect the suitable filling device, the refrigerant recovery machine or the refrigerant recovery unit and the manifold
gauge set with a vacuum pump.
3. Open the air suction valve and discharge valve, and start the vacuum pump. Run the vacuum pump for at least 45 minutes
before refilling to remove the water in the system. When the readings of vacuum degree on the suction gauge stay at 88 kpa
(26-inch mercury column) or higher for 30 minutes, cut off the valve and turn off the vacuum pump. If the vacuum of
refrigeration system cannot reach to the specified value, the system may be leaky and must be repaired. If the refrigeration
system can stay at the specified vacuum degree for at least 30 minutes, start the vacuum pump and open the suction valve
and discharge valve.Afterwards, vacuum the system for 10 minutes.
4. Close all the valves, turn off and disconnect the vacuum pump.
5. Filling of refrigeration system => Refer to page 389.
12.3 Refrigerant filling

Danger

Please refer to relevant warnings and notes of this system before repair work. Failure to observe the warnings and notes may
result in death or serious personal injury.

Note

NOTE:Always refer to the HVAC Specification Label under the hood for the refrigerant filling specification of the
vehicle concerned.
After all the refrigeration system leaks have been repaired, vacuum the system and fill with refrigerant. For the proper
filling quantity of the refrigerant, please refer to the HVAC Specification Label under the hood.
Use the HFC-134a refrigerant charge and discharge machine that meets the SAE Standard J2210 to charge the system with
HFC-134a refrigerant. For correct maintenance and usage of the equipment, please refer to the instruction manual provided
by the equipment manufacturer.

Note

A small amount of refrigerant oil is removed from the air conditioning system each time the refrigeration system is
recovered and vacuumed. Before charging the air conditioning system, compensate the refrigerant oil lost during the
recovery process. Refer to the equipment manufacturer instructions for more information.
1. Discharge the refrigeration system=>Refer to Page 388.
2. Connect the manifold gauge set and the HFC-134a refrigerant charge and discharge machine that meets the SAE standard
J2210 to the refrigeration system.
3. Measure the proper amount of refrigerant and heat it to 52°C with suitable equipment. For correct maintenance and usage
of the equipment, please refer to the instruction manual provided by the equipment manufacturer.
4. Open the suction and the discharge valves, and then the filling valve, and the heated refrigerant will flow into the system.
5. When the transmission of refrigerant stops, close the suction and the discharge valves.
6. If all the filled refrigerant cannot be transmitted from the distribution device, turn on all the switches of windows and air
conditioning controller, so that the compressor will engage and set the blower motor to the lowest speed. Run the engine at a
steadily high idle speed (1400 r/min). If the air conditioning compressor does not engage, check the compressor control
circuit and repair as required.
7. Open the valve on the low-pressure side to transfer the remaining refrigerant to the refrigeration system.

Danger

Take care not to open the discharge valve (high-pressure side) when filling. Failure to follow the warning may result in
possible personal injury or death.
8. Disconnect the filling equipment and manifold gauge set from the refrigeration system service port.

Repair Group 73- A/C System 389


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

9 .Install the protective cap onto the refrigeration system service port.

13 Filling Quantity
13.1 Air conditioning refrigerant
Air conditioning compressor Total filling quantity
Scroll type air conditioning compressor 500g

13.2 Air conditioning refrigerant oil

Tips
 Refrigerant model: HFC-134a. Never use the refrigerant oil of different brands.
 Do not use the air conditioning refrigerant oil stored in a container that has been opened for a long time.

Important information:
As the air conditioning refrigerant oil has a strong water absorption capacity, the container shall be sealed immediately once
opened to prevent water from penetrating.
Do not dispose of air conditioning refrigerant oil with engine oil or transmission oil due to its chemical properties.
Distribution of air conditioning refrigerant oil
Before starting the air conditioner, the refrigerant oil within the bottom case of air conditioning compressor should be
distributed in the refrigerant circulation circuit:
 Air conditioning compressor: about 50%
 Condenser: about 10%
 Inlet hose: about 10%
 Evaporator: about 20%
 Air conditioning receiver-drier: about 10%

390 Repair Group 73- A/C System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

74 Network Communication System


1 Brief introduction

The vehicle wiring harness is divided into three data buses CAN, LIN and K-line. The bus line connects the control units in
the form of a network to transmit commands and information.
The body controller provides a channel for data transmission and exchange of CAN bus and LIN bus.
The K-line is used for diagnostic communication between the exterior test unit and the on-board ECU.Initialization can also
be established before communication through the K-line.
The control units connected on the same bus adopt the same communication protocol (format) and baud rate (transmission
speed) to transfer information.

2 Technical parameters

Transmission rate
Name Transmission rate (Kbit/s)
CAN data bus 125–500Kbit/s

Repair Group 74 - Network Communication System 391


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3 Overview of network communication system

1- Airbag controller 2 - DA machine/AVN navigation


3- A/C controller 4 - CAN bus (low speed)
5 - Instrument cluster 6- ABS controller
7- Engine control unit 8 - Intelligent battery sensor
9 - Diagnose plug 10 - Body controller
11 - CAN bus (high speed) 12 - Electronic assistance
13 - Automatic transmission control unit 14 - Steering angle sensor
15 - LIN bus 16 - Rain/light sensor

4 CAN bus system


Introduction
CAN is the abbreviation of Controller Area Network.
CAN bus is a type of communication protocol developed for data exchange among various control units and testing,
diagnosis and feedback display equipment of the vehicle.
As a type of multi-master bus, CAN bus can support the communication network in distributed real-time control, with a
communication medium of twisted pair, coaxial cable or optical fiber.
Features

392 Repair Group 74 - Network Communication System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

1. CAN bus works in a way of multi-master, any node on the network can actively send information to other nodes on the
network at any time, regardless of master or slave, with flexible communication modes.Node information like the address is
not needed.
2. Node information on N network of CAN bus can be divided into different priorities, which can meet different real-time
requirements.Data at the high priority can be transferred in 134us at most.
3. CAN bus adopts a non-destructive bus arbitration technique, when several nodes send data on the bus at the same time,
the low priority nodes stop sending initiatively.However, the node with the highest priority will not be affected but to
transmit the data.
4. Provision of complex function of "multi-system"
5. Only by frame filtering, can the CAN bus transmit data with the modes of point-to-point, point-to-multipoints and
universal broadcasting, etc.
6. Short frame structure is adopted in CAN bus, with short transmission time and low probability of interference.It possesses
an excellent effect of error detection.
7. Every frame information of CAN bus has the CRC check and other error detection measures, thus to ensure an extremely
low data error rate.

5 LIN bus system


Introduction
LIN is the acronym for Local Interconnect Network.
Local Interconnect (local area network) means that all the control units are placed in a limited space (e.g. roof).Therefore, it
is also known as ―LAN subsystem‖.
LIN- master control unit
The control unit connected to CAN data bus executes main functions of LIN.
Features
1. It monitors data transmission and transmission rate, and sends message titles.
2. A cycle is set in the software of the control unit, which is used for determining when and how many times messages are
sent to the LIN data bus.
3. The control unit will act as an ―interpreter‖ between the CAN bus and the LIN control unit of LIN data bus system, and it
is the only control unit that connects with CAN data bus in LIN bus system.
4. In the LIN data bus system, a single control unit or sensor or actuator can be regarded as a LIN slave control unit.
5. A piece of electronic device is integrated in the sensor, which can analyze the measurement values.
The value is transferred through the LIN bus as a data signal.
6. Some sensors or actuators only use one pin on the outlet of LIN main control unit.
7. LIN actuator elements are all intelligent electronic or electromechanical components, and all these components will
receive tasks through LIN data signal of the LIN main control unit. The LIN main control unit obtains the actual state of
executive components through integrated sensors, and makes comparison between specified state and actual state.

Tips
Sensors and actuators will not respond until the LIN main control unit sends out the title.
Transmission of data
The rate of data transmission is 1-20Kbit/s, which is set by the software of LIN control unit.

Repair Group 74 - Network Communication System 393


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

6 K-Line
The K-line is used for diagnostic communication between the exterior test unit and the on-board ECU.Initialization can also
be established before communication through the K-line.
With single-wire communication, K-line adopts half-duplex serial communication.
Features
1. Support large current
2. Seamless connection with control unit CMOS level.
3. Protective effect on the ground wire.
4. The communication of the two parties can be transmitted in a unit of "rows" by turns.
5. Every unit of the serial communication code includes 10-bit binary data, namely, start bit, 8-bit data and stop bit. Idle
waiting is set after the transmitting of every unit.
6. The information line is composed of the following data: the first data indicates how much data the line still needs to send;
the second data indicates the key code and how to operate this time; the third data indicates the data to be transmitted.
7 .The information line includes the inverse code used for verification, after the data is transmitted by one party, the other
part will verify the inverse code responded to this data.As the K-line is single-wire communication, only when the inverse
code which responded to this data is verified properly, can the communication be conducted smoothly.
Transmission of data
Bit rate of K-line can reach 50kbit/s at most.

394 Repair Group 74 - Network Communication System


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

75 Attachment Device
1 Reminder
1.1 Brief introduction

Besides warning lights, the information center also provides plenty of alarm information with alarm sounds. The driver can
be promptly informed about various faults during driving, thus ensuring traffic safety.
The instrument is equipped with the following audible alarms:
Parking distance alarm: refer to Parking Help;
Small light ON alarm: when the key is removed, if the small light is still on and driver door open, the alarm will sound;
Key in ignition reminder: when the key is not removed, but the driver door is open;
Seat belt reminder alarm: when the seat belt is not fastened and the speed is more than 20km/h;
Low oil pressure alarm: when the oil pressure is insufficient but the engine is started, the alarm will sound as a reminder;
Steering alarm: voice prompts along with the flashing of the steering light.

1.2 Driver side seat belt switch

Tips
As the driver side seat belt switch is integrated in the seat belt buckle assembly, it cannot be removed separately. If
necessary, only replace the seat belt buckle assembly.

Removal
Remove driver side seat belt buckle assembly => Refer to page 277.
Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

1.3 Front passenger side seat belt switch

Tips
As the front passenger side seat belt switch is integrated in the seat belt buckle assembly, it cannot be removed separately. If
necessary, only replace the seat belt buckle assembly.

Removal
Remove driver side seat belt buckle assembly => Electrical equipment; Repair Group: 72: Protection system; Seat belt;
Removal and installation of the front seat belt buckle assembly.

Installation

Repair Group 75 - Attachment Device 395


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

1.4 Ignition switch

Remove the ignition => Refer to page 196.

2 Cigarette lighter
2.1 Brief introduction
The cigarette lighter is located in most front of the auxiliary instrument panel, and can be used as a 12V on-board power
outlet.
The ignition must be ON, when the cigarette lighter power outlet is used.
Note
The voltage of cigarette lighter power outlet is rated at 12V DC.Any electrical equipment with a voltage higher than the
rated one should not be used.

2.2 Cigarette lighter seat

Removal
1. Turn off the ignition and all the electrical equipment, and remove the ignition key.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable=>Electrical Equipment: Repair Group: 60; Power Distribution; Battery:
Battery Cables: Disconnection and Connection of Battery Negative Cable.
3. Remove gearshift cover plate => Vehicle body and painting; Repair Group 84; Interior equipment; Auxiliary
instrument panel: Removal and installation of the auxiliary instrument panel underframe assembly.
4. Push out cigarette lighter seat along the direction of -Arrow B-.
5. Press the fixing clip -Arrow A- and take out the guide ring.

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

396 Repair Group 75 - Attachment Device


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

3. USB cable
USB cable is a exterior bus standard, which is used for standardizing the connection and communication between the on
board audio system and the exterior device. USB interface supports plug-and-play and hot-plug functions.

4. Multimedia interface cable


Multimedia interface cable applies exterior bus standard, which is used for standardizing connection and communication
between the on-board audio system and the multimedia interface equipment. The multimedia interface supports the
functions of plug-and-play and hot-plug.

Repair Group 75 - Attachment Device 397


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5. Horn System
5.1 Brief introduction
Two-tone speaker system is equipped with two electromagnetic speakers. Speaker system includes the following major
components:
 Speaker: two speakers on the front bumper anti-collision beam.
 Speaker switch: under the trim cover of the steering wheel.

5.2 Check and Diagnosis


5.2.1 Speaker not sounding
No. Inspection steps Check results
0 Preliminary Inspection Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the speaker Replace the speaker
Proceed to Step 3. Speaker fuse blown
fuse is blown fuse
1 Inspect the horn relay Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the speaker
Proceed to Step 2. Speaker relay damaged Replace the horn relay
relay is damaged
Check the speaker
2 Normal There's a fault Operation methods
connector
Check whether the speaker Speaker connector Repair or replace the
Proceed to Step 1.
connector is corrosive corrosive speaker connector
3 Inspect the horn switch Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the speaker Speaker switch contact Replace the speaker
Proceed to Step 4.
switch contact is ablate ablated switch
4 Check the horn Normal There's a fault Operation methods
Check whether the speaker
Proceed to Step 5. Speaker damaged Replace the horn
is damaged
5 Check the operation Normal There's a fault Operation methods
After finishing the correct
Find the cause from
overhaul, check whether End of diagnosis Faults still exist
other symptoms
the fault is still there.

398 Repair Group 75 - Attachment Device


X25 2015
Electrical Equipment

5.3 Removal and installation of speaker

Removal

Tips
The instruction is only for the removal and installation of the left speaker, but may serve as a reference for the right side.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable=>Electrical Equipment: Repair Group: 60; Power Distribution; Battery:
Battery Cables: Disconnection and Connection of Battery Negative Cable.
2. Remove the engine lower baffle=>Vehicle Body and Painting; Repair Group:83; Exterior equipment; Removal and
installation of engine lower baffle.
3. Press the unlocking device of horn connecting plug -Arrow A- and
disengage the connector.
4. Unscrew the fixing bolt -Arrow B- and remove the horn -1- from the
bumper beam.
Bolt -Arrow- specification: M8×1.25×25
Bolt -Arrow - tightening torque: 21 - 25 Nm
Bolt -Arrow- tool: 13mm hexagon sleeve

Installation
Install in reverse order of removal procedures.

5.4 Horn switch

The horn switch is located under the steering wheel trim cover, but cannot be repaired separately.

Repair Group 75 - Attachment Device 399

You might also like